Vous êtes sur la page 1sur 324

ALS

Access Link Series


PDH radio family

User manual

MN.00183.E - 003
Volume 1/1
The information contained in this handbook is subject to change without notice.
Property of Siae Microelettronica S.p.A. All rights reserved according to the law and according to the inter-
national regulations. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any
means, electronic or mechanical, without written permission from Siae Microelettronica S.p.A.
Unless otherwise specified, reference to a Company, name, data and address produced on the screen dis-
played is purely indicative aiming at illustrating the use of the product.
MS-DOS®, MS Windows® are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
HP®, HP OpenView NNM and HP–UX are Hewlett Packard Company registered trademarks.
UNIX is a UNIX System Laboratories registered trademark.
Oracle® is a Oracle Corporation registered trademark.
Linux term is a trademark registered by Linus Torvalds, the original author of the Linux operating system.
Linux is freely distributed according the GNU General Public License (GPL).
Other products cited here in are constructor registered trademarks.
Contents

Section 1.
USER GUIDE 11

1 DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY ..............................................................................11

2 FIRST AID FOR ELECTRICAL SHOCK AND SAFETY RULES .........................................12


2.1 FIRST AID FOR ELECTRICAL SHOCK ....................................................................12
2.1.1 Artificial respiration .................................................................................12
2.1.2 Treatment of burns .................................................................................12
2.2 SAFETY RULES .................................................................................................13
2.3 CORRECT DISPOSAL OF THIS PRODUCT (Waste electrical & electronic equipment) ....15
2.4 INTERNAL BATTERY ..........................................................................................15

3 PURPOSE AND STRUCTURE OF THE MANUAL ............................................................16


3.1 PURPOSE OF THE MANUAL .................................................................................16
3.2 AUDIENCE BASIC KNOWLEDGE ..........................................................................16
3.3 STRUCTURE OF THE MANUAL .............................................................................16

Section 2.
DESCRIPTIONS AND SPECIFICATION 19

4 ABBREVIATION LIST................................................................................................19
4.1 LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS...................................................................................19

5 SYSTEM PRESENTATION ..........................................................................................21


5.1 RADIO SYSTEM OVERVIEW ................................................................................21
5.1.1 General .................................................................................................21
5.2 RECOMMENDATION ..........................................................................................21
5.3 APPLICATION ...................................................................................................21
5.4 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE ....................................................................................22
5.4.1 Modular IDU...........................................................................................22
5.4.2 Compact IDU unit ...................................................................................23
5.4.3 Modular IDU Plus ....................................................................................23
5.4.4 IDU Plus Compact Unit (5.4.4)..................................................................24
5.4.5 ODU......................................................................................................24
5.5 MANAGEMENT SYSTEM......................................................................................25

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003 1


5.5.1 Hardware platform ..................................................................................25
5.5.2 Management ports ..................................................................................25
5.5.3 Protocols ...............................................................................................25

6 EQUIPMENT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS...............................................................28


6.1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................................28
6.2 SERVICE CHANNELS .........................................................................................28
6.3 TRANSMISSION CAPACITY .................................................................................29
6.4 POWER SUPPLY, CONSUMPTION AND MECHANICAL CHARACTERISTICS ...................31

7 CHARACTERISTICS OF THE INDOOR UNIT ...............................................................40


7.1 GENERAL.........................................................................................................40
7.2 TRIBUTARY INTERFACE .....................................................................................40
7.2.1 2 Mbit/s interface....................................................................................40
7.2.2 34 Mbit/s interface ..................................................................................41
7.2.3 Ethernet interface ...................................................................................41
7.3 STM-1 INTERFACE ............................................................................................41
7.3.1 Characteristics of STM-1 electrical interface ................................................42
7.4 SERVICE CHANNEL INTERFACE...........................................................................43
7.4.1 2 Mbit/s wayside interface........................................................................43
7.4.2 64 kbit/s co–directional interface ..............................................................43
7.4.3 64 kbit/s contra–directional interface V.11 .................................................44
7.4.4 Analogue interface ..................................................................................44
7.4.5 9600 bit/s low speed synchronous/asynchronous data .................................44
7.4.6 9600 or 2x4800 bit/s low speed asynchronous data .....................................44
7.4.7 Alarm interface.......................................................................................44
7.4.8 Network Management Interface ................................................................45
7.5 MODULATOR/DEMODULATOR .............................................................................46
7.6 CABLE INTERFACE ............................................................................................46
7.7 AVAILABLE LOOPS ............................................................................................46

8 DESCRIPTION OF THE MODULAR IDU FOR 2 OR 34 Mbit/s TRIBUTARIES ................47


8.1 1+0/1+1 MODULAR IDU VERSION ......................................................................47
8.1.1 LIM .......................................................................................................47
8.1.2 Circuit description ...................................................................................47
8.1.3 RIM.......................................................................................................50
8.1.3.1 QAM modulator ........................................................................50
8.1.3.2 QAM demodulator.....................................................................50
8.1.3.3 Power supply ...........................................................................50
8.1.3.4 Telemetry IDU/ODU..................................................................50
8.1.4 CONTROLLER .........................................................................................51
8.1.4.1 Service signals.........................................................................51
8.1.4.2 Equipment software..................................................................51
8.1.4.3 Supervision ports .....................................................................52
8.2 IDU LOOPS ......................................................................................................52
8.2.1 Tributary loop.........................................................................................52
8.2.2 Baseband unit loop .................................................................................52
8.2.3 IDU loop ................................................................................................53

9 DESCRIPTION OF THE MODULAR IDU WITH lim ETHERNET (2 Mbit/s TRIBUTARIES +


ETHERNET TRAFFIC) ...............................................................................................63
9.1 1+0/1+1 MODULAR IDU ....................................................................................63

2 ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


9.1.1 LIM Ethernet: 2 Mbit/s tributaries..............................................................63
9.1.2 Circuit description ...................................................................................63
9.1.3 LIM Ethernet: Ethernet traffic ...................................................................66
9.1.3.1 2 Mbit/s tributaries ...................................................................66
9.1.3.2 Electrical Ethernet interface .......................................................67
9.1.3.3 Front panel LEDs ......................................................................67
9.1.3.4 Switch function ........................................................................67
9.1.3.5 Ethernet Full Duplex function .....................................................68
9.1.3.6 Link Loss Forwarding ................................................................68
9.1.3.7 MDI/MDIX cross–over ...............................................................68
9.1.3.8 VLAN functionality ....................................................................69
9.1.3.9 Switch organized by port ...........................................................69
9.1.3.10 Switch organized by VLAN ID .....................................................69
9.1.3.11 Layer 2, Priority function, QoS, 802.1p........................................70
9.1.3.12 Layer 3, Priority function, QoS, IP–V4 ToS (DSCP) ........................71
9.1.4 RIM.......................................................................................................71
9.1.4.1 QAM modulator ........................................................................71
9.1.4.2 QAM demodulator.....................................................................71
9.1.4.3 Power supply ...........................................................................71
9.1.4.4 Telemetry IDU/ODU..................................................................72
9.1.5 CONTROLLER .........................................................................................72
9.1.5.1 Service signals.........................................................................72
9.1.6 Equipment software ................................................................................72
9.1.6.1 Supervision ports .....................................................................73
9.2 IDU LOOPS ......................................................................................................74
9.2.1 Tributary loop.........................................................................................74
9.2.2 Baseband unit loop .................................................................................74
9.2.3 IDU loop ................................................................................................74

10 DESCRIPTION OF THE IDU COMPACT UNIT FOR 2 Mbit/s TRIBUTARIES ..................81


10.1 IDU COMPACT 1+0/1+1 VERSION ......................................................................81

11 DESCRIPTION OF THE IDU COMPACT UNIT FOR 2 Mbit/s TRIBUTARIES AND


FOR ETHERNET TRAFFIC ..........................................................................................82
11.1 VERSION IDU COMPACT ETHERNET 1+0/1+1 .......................................................82

12 DESCRIPTION OF THE MODULAR IDU PLUS FOR 2 Mbit/s TRIBUTARIES HIERARCHIC


AND NOT HIERARCHIC ............................................................................................83
12.1 GENERAL.........................................................................................................83
12.2 COMPOSITION OF TERMINAL 1RU .......................................................................83
12.3 COMPOSITION OF TERMINAL 2RU .......................................................................84
12.4 1RU TERMINAL.................................................................................................84
12.5 2RU TERMINAL.................................................................................................85
12.6 2 Mbit/s TRIBUTARY INTERFACE .........................................................................85
12.7 MATRIX STM1+16E1 (1RU and 2RU) ...................................................................85
12.8 DROP-INSERT (2RU) .........................................................................................85
12.9 NODAL (UP TO 3X2RU)......................................................................................87
12.9.1 Expansion from 2 to 3 nodes ....................................................................87
12.9.2 Reduction from 3 to 2 nodes.....................................................................88
12.10 DYNAMIC MODULATION ....................................................................................90
12.10.1Capacity reduction .................................................................................90
12.10.2Setting with SCT/LCT .............................................................................91
12.11 LIM.................................................................................................................91

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003 3


12.12 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION......................................................................................91
12.13 RIM ................................................................................................................93
12.13.1QAM modulator .....................................................................................94
12.13.2QAM demodulator ..................................................................................94
12.13.3Power supply.........................................................................................94
12.13.4Telemetry IDU/ODU ...............................................................................94
12.14 EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER..................................................................................94
12.14.1Service signals ......................................................................................95
12.14.2Equipment software ...............................................................................95
12.14.3Supervision ports ...................................................................................96
12.15 IDU LOOPS ......................................................................................................96
12.15.1Tributary loop........................................................................................96
12.15.2Baseband unit loop ................................................................................96
12.15.3IDU loop ...............................................................................................97
12.16 EXPANSION 53E1 .............................................................................................97
12.17 SERVICE CHANNEL ADAPTER .............................................................................97
12.18 PROCESSOR 53E1.............................................................................................97

13 DESCRIPTION OF THE IDU COMPACT PLUS FOR 2 Mbit/s TRIBUTARIES AND ETHERNET
TRAFFIC ................................................................................................................103
13.1 IDU COMPACT PLUS ETHERNET 1+0/1+1 VERSION ............................................. 103

14 DESCRIPTION OF THE MODULAR IDU FOR E/W REPEATER WITH DROP/INSERT ...104
14.1 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 104
14.2 COMPOSITION ............................................................................................... 104
14.3 IDU CHARACTERISTICS ................................................................................... 105
14.3.1 Management of tributaries ..................................................................... 105
14.3.2 Capacity .............................................................................................. 105
14.3.3 E1 switching criteria .............................................................................. 105
14.4 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION.................................................................................... 105
14.4.1 Matrix ................................................................................................. 106
14.4.2 Processor............................................................................................. 106
14.4.3 RIM..................................................................................................... 109
14.4.3.1 QAM modulator ...................................................................... 109
14.4.3.2 QAM demodulator................................................................... 109
14.4.3.3 Power supply ......................................................................... 109
14.4.3.4 Telemetry IDU/ODU................................................................ 109
14.4.4 CONTROLLER ....................................................................................... 110
14.4.4.1 Service signals....................................................................... 110
14.4.4.2 Equipment software................................................................ 110
14.4.4.3 Supervision ports ................................................................... 111
14.5 IDU LOOPS .................................................................................................... 111
14.5.1 Tributary loop....................................................................................... 111
14.5.2 Baseband unit loop ............................................................................... 111
14.5.3 IDU loop .............................................................................................. 112

15 CHARACTERISTICS OF THE OUTDOOR UNIT ...........................................................116


15.1 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 116
15.2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION ............................................................................. 116

16 OUTDOOR UNIT DESCRIPTION...............................................................................118


16.1 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 118

4 ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


16.2 TRANSMIT SECTION........................................................................................ 118
16.3 RECEIVE SECTION .......................................................................................... 119
16.4 CABLE INTERFACE .......................................................................................... 119
16.5 ATPC OPERATION ........................................................................................... 119
16.6 1+1 Tx SYSTEM............................................................................................. 119
16.7 POWER SUPPLY .............................................................................................. 120

17 24/48 VOLT DC/DC CONVERTER D52089 ...............................................................126


17.1 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 126
17.2 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS ........................................................................ 126
17.3 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS ....................................................................... 126

Section 3.
INSTALLATION 131

18 INSTALLATION AND PROCEDURES FOR ENSURING THE ELECTROMAGNETIC


COMPATIBILITY.....................................................................................................131
18.1 GENERAL INFORMATION TO BE READ BEFORE THE INSTALLATION........................ 131
18.2 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 132
18.3 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION............................................................................ 132
18.3.1 IDU installation..................................................................................... 132
18.3.2 1RU IDU installation .............................................................................. 132
18.3.3 2RU IDU installation .............................................................................. 132
18.4 ELECTRICAL WIRING....................................................................................... 132
18.5 CONNECTIONS TO THE SUPPLY MAINS .............................................................. 134
18.6 GROUNDING CONNECTION .............................................................................. 134

19 MODULAR IDU USER CONNECTIONS ......................................................................135


19.1 CONNECTOR POSITION FOR 1+0/1+1 MODULAR VERSION .................................. 135
19.2 MODULAR VERSION CONNECTORS.................................................................... 136

20 IDU COMPACT USER CONNECTIONS .......................................................................140


20.1 CONNECTOR POSITION FOR 1+0/1+1 COMPACT VERSION................................... 140

21 MODULAR IDU PLUS USER CONNECTIONS .............................................................144


21.1 CONNECTOR POSITION FOR 1+0/1+1 MODULAR IDU PLUS VERSION .................... 144

22 IDU COMPACT PLUS USER CONNECTIONS ..............................................................151


22.1 CONNECTOR USE FOR 1+0/1+1 IDU COMPACT PLUS VERSION............................. 151

23 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA ...........157
23.1 INSTALLATION KIT ......................................................................................... 157
23.2 REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED) ........................................... 158
23.3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ............................................................................. 158
23.4 GROUNDING .................................................................................................. 160

24 INSTALLATION ONTO THE WALL OF THE ODU WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA...........174


24.1 INSTALLATION KIT ......................................................................................... 174

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003 5


24.2 REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED) ........................................... 174
24.3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ............................................................................. 175
24.4 GROUNDING .................................................................................................. 177

25 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH INTEGRATED ANTENNA .........188
25.1 FOREWORD ................................................................................................... 188
25.2 INSTALLATION KIT ......................................................................................... 188
25.3 REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED) ........................................... 189
25.4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ............................................................................. 189
25.4.1 Installation onto the pole of the support system and the antenna ................ 189
25.4.2 Installation of ODU................................................................................ 190
25.4.3 ODU installation.................................................................................... 191
25.5 ANTENNA AIMING........................................................................................... 191
25.6 COMPATIBILITY.............................................................................................. 191
25.7 GROUNDING .................................................................................................. 192

26 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH INTEGRATED ANTENNA


(KIT V32307, V32308, V32309) .............................................................................208
26.1 FOREWORD ................................................................................................... 208
26.2 INSTALLATION KIT ......................................................................................... 208
26.3 REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED) ........................................... 209
26.4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ............................................................................. 209
26.5 1+0 MOUNTING PROCEDURES ......................................................................... 210
26.5.1 Setting antenna polarization ................................................................... 210
26.5.2 Installation of the centring ring on the antenna ......................................... 210
26.5.3 Installation of 1+0 ODU support ............................................................. 210
26.5.4 Installation onto the pole of the assembled structure ................................. 210
26.5.5 Installation of ODU (on 1+0 support)....................................................... 210
26.5.6 Antenna aiming .................................................................................... 211
26.5.7 ODU grounding..................................................................................... 211
26.6 1+1 MOUNTING PROCEDURES ......................................................................... 211
26.6.1 Installation of Hybrid ............................................................................. 211
26.6.2 Installation of ODUs (on hybrid for 1+1 version) ....................................... 212

27 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH RFS INTEGRATED ANTENNA...223
27.1 FOREWORD ................................................................................................... 223
27.2 INSTALLATION KIT ......................................................................................... 223
27.3 REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED) ........................................... 223
27.4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ............................................................................. 224
27.5 1+0 MOUNTING PROCEDURES ......................................................................... 224
27.5.1 Setting antenna polarization ................................................................... 224
27.5.2 Installation of the centring ring on the antenna ......................................... 225
27.5.3 Installation of 1+0 ODU support ............................................................. 225
27.5.4 Installation onto the pole of the assembled structure ................................. 225
27.5.5 Installation of ODU (on 1+0 support)....................................................... 225
27.5.6 Antenna aiming .................................................................................... 225
27.5.7 ODU grounding..................................................................................... 225
27.6 1+1 MOUNTING PROCEDURES ......................................................................... 226
27.6.1 Installation of Hybrid ............................................................................. 226
27.6.2 Installation of ODUs (on hybrid for 1+1 version) ....................................... 226

28 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE 4 GHz ODU WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA

6 ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


(KIT V32323).........................................................................................................237
28.1 INSTALLATION KIT ......................................................................................... 237
28.2 REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED) ........................................... 237
28.3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ............................................................................. 237

Section 4.
LINE-UP 245

29 LINE–UP OF THE RADIO HOP .................................................................................245


29.1 LINE–UP OF THE RADIO HOP............................................................................ 245
29.1.1 Equipment configuration ........................................................................ 245
29.1.2 Antenna alignment and received field measurement .................................. 246
29.1.3 Network element configuration ............................................................... 246
29.1.4 Radio checks ........................................................................................ 247

30 LINE–UP OF LIM ETHERNET/2 Mbit/s ....................................................................249


30.1 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 249
30.2 LOCAL LAN–1 PORT TO REMOTE LAN–1 PORT TRANSPARENT CONNECTION LAN
PER PORT ...................................................................................................... 249
30.3 LOCAL LAN–1 PORT TO REMOTE LAN–1 PORT TRANSPARENT CONNECTION LAN
PER PORT ...................................................................................................... 254
30.4 3 TO 1 PORT CONNECTIONS ............................................................................ 257
30.5 3 TO 1 PORT CONNECTIONS, SETTINGS FOR UNTAGGED TRAFFIC ........................ 258
30.6 3 TO 1 PORT CONNECTIONS, SETTINGS FOR TAGGED AND UNTAGGED TRAFFIC .... 260
30.7 3 TO 1 CONNECTIONS: EXAMPLES OF PRIORITY MANAGEMENT ............................ 261

31 LINE–UP OF LIM FOR EAST/WEST REPEATER WITH DROP/INSERT .......................264


31.1 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 264
31.2 BASEBAND CONFIGURATION............................................................................ 264
31.3 EAST/WEST CONFIGURATION .......................................................................... 265
31.4 EAST OR WEST PRESETTING ............................................................................ 266
31.5 TRIBUTARY ENABLING .................................................................................... 267
31.6 ONE DIRECTION TRIBUTARY CONNECTION ........................................................ 268
31.7 PROTECTED TRIBUTARY CONNECTION .............................................................. 269
31.8 PROTECTION SETTING (Rx E1 SWITCH) ............................................................ 269
31.9 PASS–THROUGH E1 CONNECTION .................................................................... 270

32 LINE-UP OF THE LINK WITH NODAL IDU ...............................................................271


32.1 OVERVIEW .................................................................................................... 271
32.2 EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION .......................................................................... 271
32.3 TRIBUTARY CONFIGURATION ........................................................................... 272
32.4 Configuration of the Cross-connection matrix ..................................................... 272
32.4.1 Tributary - Radio Cross-connection.......................................................... 273
32.4.2 Tributary - Tributary Cross-connection ..................................................... 275

33 HOW TO CHANGE ADDRESS ON REMOTE EQUIPMENT WITHOUT LOSING THE


CONNECTION .........................................................................................................277
33.1 PROCEDURE................................................................................................... 277

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003 7


Section 5.
MAINTENANCE 289

34 PERIODICAL CHECKS .............................................................................................289


34.1 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 289
34.2 CHECKS TO BE CARRIED OUT .......................................................................... 289

35 TROUBLESHOOTING...............................................................................................290
35.1 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 290
35.2 TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE ..................................................................... 290
35.2.1 Loop facilities ....................................................................................... 290
35.2.2 Alarm messages processing.................................................................... 291

36 EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION UPLOAD/SAVE/DOWNLOAD. PARAMETER


MODIFICATION AND CREATION OF VIRTUAL CONFIGURATIONS. ..........................292
36.1 SCOPE .......................................................................................................... 292
36.2 PROCEDURE................................................................................................... 292
36.2.1 General equipment configuration............................................................. 292
36.2.2 Addresses and routing table ................................................................... 293
36.2.3 Remote Element Table........................................................................... 294

37 BACK UP FULL EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION WITHOUT POSSIBILITY OF MODIFYING


THE PARAMETERS .................................................................................................295
37.1 SCOPE .......................................................................................................... 295
37.2 CONFIGURATION UPLOAD ............................................................................... 295
37.3 CONFIGURATION DOWNLOAD .......................................................................... 295

Section 6.
PROGRAMMING AND SUPERVISION 297

38 PROGRAMMING AND SUPERVISION .......................................................................297


38.1 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 297

Section 7.
COMPOSITION 299

39 COMPOSITION OF MODULAR IDU...........................................................................299


39.1 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 299
39.2 IDU PART NUMBER ......................................................................................... 299
39.3 COMPOSITION OF THE INDOOR UNIT................................................................ 300

40 COMPOSITION OF COMPACT IDU ...........................................................................303


40.1 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 303
40.2 ALC IDU PART NUMBER ................................................................................... 303

8 ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


41 COMPOSITION OF IDU COMPACT PLUS (ALC PLUS) ...............................................304
41.1 OVERVIEW .................................................................................................... 304
41.2 PART NUMBER OF IDU..................................................................................... 304

42 COMPOSITION OF IDU PLUS ..................................................................................305


42.1 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 305
42.2 IDU PLUS PART NUMBER ................................................................................. 305
42.3 COMPOSITION OF THE IDU PLUS ...................................................................... 305
42.3.1 1+0 1RU 32E1 Terminal......................................................................... 306
42.3.2 1+1 1RU 24E1 Terminal......................................................................... 306
42.3.3 1+1 1RU 32E1 terminal ......................................................................... 307
42.3.4 1+1 terminal 2RU 53E1 ......................................................................... 307
42.3.5 2RU 32E1 drop/insert ............................................................................ 308
42.3.6 Nodal 2RU STM1 E1 .............................................................................. 308

43 COMPOSITION OF OUTDOOR UNIT.........................................................................309


43.1 GENERAL....................................................................................................... 309

Section 8.
LISTS AND SERVICES 313

44 LIST OF FIGURES ...................................................................................................313

45 LIST OF TABLES .....................................................................................................319

46 ASSISTANCE SERVICE............................................................................................321

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003 9


10 ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Section 1.
USER GUIDE

1 DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY

SIAE Microelettronica S.p.A. declares that the products:

- digital radio relay system ALS4


- digital radio relay system ALS7

- digital radio relay system ALS8

- digital radio relay system ALS11


- digital radio relay system ALS13

- digital radio relay system ALS15

- digital radio relay system ALS18

- digital radio relay system ALS23

- digital radio relay system ALS25

- digital radio relay system ALS28


- digital radio relay system ALS32

- digital radio relay system ALS38

complies with the essential requirements of article 3 of the R&TTE Directive (1999/5/EC) and therefore is
marked CE.

The following standards have been applied:

- EN 60950-1: 2006 “Safety of information technology equipment”.


- EN 301 489–4 V.1.3.1 (2002–8): “Electromagnetic compatibility and radio spectrum Matters (ERM);
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) standard for radio equipment and services; Part 4. Specific con-
ditions for fixed radio links and ancillary equipment and services”

- ETSI EN 301 751 V.1.1. (2002–12): “Fixed Radio Systems; Point–to point equipment and antennas;
generic harmonized standard for point–to–point digital fixed radio systems and antennas covering the
essential requirements under article 3.2 of the 1999/5/EC Directive”.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


11
2 FIRST AID FOR ELECTRICAL SHOCK AND SAFETY
RULES

2.1 FIRST AID FOR ELECTRICAL SHOCK

Do not touch the bare hands until the circuit has been opened. pen the circuit by switching off the line
switches. If that is not possible protect yourself with dry material and free the patient from the con-
ductor.

2.1.1 Artificial respiration

It is important to start mouth respiration at once and to call a doctor immediately. suggested procedure
for mouth to mouth respiration method is described in the Tab.1.

2.1.2 Treatment of burns

This treatment should be used after the patient has regained consciousness. It can also be employed while
artificial respiration is being applied (in this case there should be at least two persons present).

Warning

• Do not attempt to remove clothing from burnt sections

• Apply dry gauze on the burns

• Do not apply ointments or other oily substances.

12
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Tab.1 - Artificial respiration

Step Description Figure

Lay the patient on his back with his arms parallel to the body.
If the patient is laying on an inclined plane, make sure that his
1 stomach is slightly lower than his chest. Open the patients
mouth and check that there is no foreign matter in mouth (den-
tures, chewing gum, etc.).

Kneel beside the patient level with his head. Put an hand under
the patient’s head and one under his neck.
Lift the patient’s head and let it recline backwards as far
2 as possible.

Shift the hand from the patient’s neck to his chin and his
mouth, the index along his jawbone, and keep the other fingers
closed together.

3 While performing these operations take a good supply of oxy-


gen by taking deep breaths with your mouth open

With your thumb between the patient’s chin and mouth keep
his lips together and blow into his nasal cavities

While performing these operations observe if the patient’s


chest rises. If not it is possible that his nose is blocked: in that
case open the patient’s mouth as much as possible by pressing
on his chin with your hand, place your lips around his mouth
and blow into his oral cavity. Observe if the patient’s chest
5
heaves. This second method can be used instead of the first
even when the patient’s nose is not obstructed, provided his
nose is kept closed by pressing the nostrils together using the
hand you were holding his head with. The patient’s head must
be kept sloping backwards as much as possible.

Start with ten rapid expirations, hence continue at a rate of


twelve/fifteen expirations per minute. Go on like this until the
6
patient has regained conscious–ness, or until a doctor has as-
certained his death.

2.2 SAFETY RULES

When the equipment units are provided with the plate, shown in Fig.1, it means that they contain compo-
nents electrostatic charge sensitive.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


13
Fig.1 - Components electrostatic charge sensitive indication

In order to prevent the units from being damaged while handling, it is advisable to wear an elasticized band
(Fig.2) around the wrist ground connected through coiled cord (Fig.3).

Fig.2 - Elasticized band

Fig.3 - Coiled cord

The units showing the label, shown in Fig.4, include laser diodes and the emitted power can be dangerous
for eyes; avoid exposure in the direction of optical signal emission.

Fig.4 - Laser indication

14
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
2.3 CORRECT DISPOSAL OF THIS PRODUCT (Waste electrical &
electronic equipment)

(Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate collection systems). This
marking of Fig.5 shown on the product or its literature, indicates that it should not be disposed with other
household wastes at the end of its working life. To prevent possible harm to the environment or human
health from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate this from other types of wastes and recycle it
responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources. Household users should contact either
the retailer where they purchased this product, or their local government office, for details of where and
how they can take this item for environmentally safe recycling. Business users should contact their supplier
and check the terms and conditions of the purchase contract. This product should not be mixed with other
commercial wastes for disposal.

Fig.5 - WEEE symbol - 2002/96/CE EN50419

2.4 INTERNAL BATTERY

Inside the equipment, in IDU unit, there is a lithium battery.

CAUTION: Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries
according to law.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


15
3 PURPOSE AND STRUCTURE OF THE MANUAL

3.1 PURPOSE OF THE MANUAL

The purpose of this manual consists in providing the user with information which permit to operate and
maintain the AL radio family.

Warning: This manual does not include information relevant to the SCT/LCT management program win-
dows and relevant application. They will provided by the program itself as help-on line.

3.2 AUDIENCE BASIC KNOWLEDGE

The following knowledge and skills are required to operate the equipment:

• a basic understanding of microwave transmission

• installation and maintenance experience on digital radio system

• a good knowledge of IP/OSI networks and routing policy.

3.3 STRUCTURE OF THE MANUAL

The manual is subdivided into sections each of them developing a specific topic entitling the section.

Each section consists of a set of chapters, enlarging the main subject master.

Section 1 – User Guide

It provides the information about the main safety rules and expounds the purpose and the structure of the
manual.

Section 2 – Description and specifications

It traces the broad line of equipment operation and lists the main technical characteristics of the whole
equipment and units it consists of.
List of abbreviation meaning is also supplied.

Section 3 – Installation

The mechanical installation procedures are herein set down as well as the user electrical connections.

The content of the tool kit (if supplied) is also listed.

16
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Section 4 – Line–Up

Line–up procedures are described as well as checks to be carried out for the equipment correct operation.
The list of the instruments to be used and their characteristics are also set down.

Section 5 – Maintenance

The routine maintenance actions are described as well as fault location procedures in order to identify the
faulty unit and to re–establish the operation after its replacement with a spare one.

Section 6 – Programming and supervision

The AL radio family is programmed and supervised using different software tools. Some of them are al-
ready available, some other will be available in the future.

This section lists the tools implemented and indicates if descriptions are already available.

Each description of software tools is supplied in a separated manual.

Section 7 – Composition

Position, part numbers of the components the equipment consist of, are shown in this section.

Section 8 – Lists and assistance

This section contains the lists of figures and tables and the assistance service information.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


17
18
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Section 2.
DESCRIPTIONS AND SPECIFI-
CATION

4 ABBREVIATION LIST

4.1 LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS

- AF Assured Forwarding

- AL Access Link
- ALS Access LInk Series

- AIS Alarm Indication Signal

- ATPC Automaric Transmit Power Control


- BB Baseband

- BBER Background Block Error Radio

- BER Bit Error Rate

- DSCP Differentiated Service Code Point

- DSP Digital Signal Processing

- E1 2 Mbit/s
- EMC/EMI Electromagnetic Compatibility/Electromagnetic Interference

- EOC Embedded Overhead Channel

- ERC European Radiocommunication Committee

- ESD Electrostatic Discharge

- FEC Forward Error Corrector

- FEM Fast Ethernet Module

- HDLC High Level Data Link Control

- IDU Indoor Unit

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


19
- IF Intermediate Frequency

- IpToS Type of Service IP

- LAN Local Area Network

- LAPS Link Access Procedure SDH

- LCT Local Craft Terminal

- LIM Line Interface Module

- LLF Link Loss Forwarding


- LOF Loss Of Frame

- LOS Loss Of Signal

- MAC Media Access Control

- MDI Medium Dependent Interface

- MDIX Medium Dependent Interface Crossover

- MIB Management Information Base

- MMIC Monolitic Microwave Integrated Circuit

- MTBF Mean Time Between Failure

- NE Network Element

- ODU Outdoor Unit


- OSI Open System Interconnection

- PDH Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy

- PPI Plesiochronous Physical Interface


- PPP Point to Point Protocol

- PTOS Priority Type Of Service

- RIM Radio Interface Module

- SCT Subnetwork Craft Terminal

- SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol

- TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol


- TOS Type Of Service

- VID Virtual LAN Identifier

- VLAN Virtual LAN


- WFQ Wait Fair Queue

- Wayside Traffic Additional 2 Mbit/s Traffic

20
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
5 SYSTEM PRESENTATION

5.1 RADIO SYSTEM OVERVIEW

5.1.1 General

Access Link Series PDH (ALS) is the name of the new PDH radio family designed by SIAE for low/medium
capacity transmission in the overall frequency bands from 4 GHz up to 38 GHz.

Different versions offer a wide range of transmission capacity using programmable 4QAM/16QAM modula-
tion or 32QAM modulation.

Reduced cost, high reliability, compact size, light weight, fully programmability are the most outstanding
performances of these equipment.

5.2 RECOMMENDATION

The equipment complies with the following international standards:


• EN 301 489–4 for EMC

• EN 302 217 for all frequency bands

• ITU–R recommendations for all frequency bands


• EN 300 132–2 characteristics for power supply

• EN 300 019 environmental characteristics (Operation class 3.2 for IDU and class 4.1 for ODU; stor-
age: class 1.2; transport: class 2.3)

• EN 60950 for safety

5.3 APPLICATION

Equipment main applications are:


• Radio links inside GSM cells of mobile radio networks

• Radio links for voice and data transmission

• LAN Ethernet extension


• Spur routes for high capacity radio systems

• Emergency links.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


21
5.4 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE

The ALS PDH equipment consists of two separate units available in different versions:

• indoor unit called IDU for rack or 19” structure mounting that interfaces the input/output tributaries
and supervises the full equipment

• outdoor unit called ODU for pole or wall mounting where the circuit forming the RF head take place.

The two units are interconnected via coaxial cable. Following figures show different ODU units and most
representative IDU units:

• Fig.6 - 1+1 ODU, pole mounting and integrated antenna

• Fig.7 - 1+1 Modular IDU, up to 16x2 Mbit/s capacity

• Fig.8 - 1+1 Modular IDU, up to 16x2 Mbit/s capacity and 4x10/100BaseT ports

• Fig.9 - 1+1 Compact IDU, up to 16x2 Mbit/s capacity and 3x10/100BaseT ports

• Fig.10 - 1+1 Modular IDU Plus, up to 53x2 Mbit/s capacity

• Fig.11 - 1+1 Modular IDU Plus, up to 24x2 Mbit/s capacity and 4x10/100BaseT ports

• Fig.12 - Modular IDU Plus, Nodal with matrix and up to 8x2 Mbit/s and 1xSTM-1 capacity

• Fig.13 - 1+1 Compact IDU Plus, up to 32x2 Mbit/s capacity and 3x10/100BaseT capacity

IDU units are available in the following versions:

• Modular IDU

• Compact IDU

• Modular IDU PLUS

• Compact IDU PLUS.

5.4.1 Modular IDU

The Modular IDU is made–up in the following versions:

• 1+0/1+1, 1 unit high, capacity 2x2, 4x2, 8x2, 16x2 Mbit/s

• 1+0/1+1, 2 unit high, capacity 32x2 Mbit/s

• 1+1, 1 unit high, capacity 34/2x34 Mbit/s

• 1+0/1+1, 1 unit high, capacity 4x2 Mbit/s + 3x10/100BaseT

• 1+0/1+1, 1unit high, capacity 16x2 Mbit/s + 4x10/100BaseT (with 32 Mbit/s max capacity).
The IDU consists of LIM, CONTROLLER, RIM modules, plug–in inserted into a wired shelf.

In the 1+0 compact version LIM/CONTROLLER/RIM functions are integrated in a single module. Following
functionality description covers both 1+0 compact and 1+0/1+1 standard versions.
The LIM interfaces the in/out tributaries and, through a multiplexing (demultiplexing) and bit insertion (bit
extraction) process, supplies (receives) the aggregate signal to the modulator (from the demodulator). In
addition the LIM performs the digital processing of the QAM modulator.

Moreover the module duplicates the main signals at the Tx side and performs the changeover at the receive
side in the 1+1 version.

The RIM contains:


• the IF section of the 4QAM/16QAM programmable modemodulator or 32QAM in alternative;

• the power supply unit that processes the battery voltage to supply power to the IDU circuits and
send the battery voltage towards the ODU;
• the cable interface for the bidirectional communication between IDU and ODU via interconnecting
cable.

22
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
The Controller performs the following:

• interfaces the service signals as 1x9600 bit/s or 2x4800 bit/s, 64 kbit/s, 2 Mbit/s (details are given
in the system technical specification)

• contains the equipment software that permits to control and to manage all the equipment function-
ality through a main controller and associated peripherals distributed within IDU and ODU

• interfaces the SCT/LCT management system through Ethernet, RS232 and USB ports

• receive external alarms and route them to relay contact along with the internal alarms generated
by the equipment.

5.4.2 Compact IDU unit

The Compact IDU unit is available in the following versions:

• 1 unit, 1+0, 2/4/8xE1

• 1 unit, 1+0, 2/4/8/16xE1


• 1 unit, 1+1, 2/4/8xE1

• 1 unit, 1+1, 2/4/8/16xE1

• 1 unit, 1+0, 2/4/8xE1 + 3ETH

• 1 unit, 1+1, 2/4/8xE1 + 3ETH

• 1 unit, 1+1, 16xE1 + 3ETH.

The Ethernet module V12252 can be housed inside the IDU, as option, for the Ethernet traffic. The compact
IDUs are made by a single card plugged into a cabled rack.

The line interfaces contain the connections of the tributaries and, by means of processes of multiplexing/
demultiplexing and of bit insertion/extraction, provide/receive the aggregate signal to/from the modulator/
demodulator. The line interfaces realize the digital processing for the QAM modulator and, in 1+1 config-
uration, duplicate the main signals on the transmission side and execute the switch on the reception side.
The interfaces to the ODU contain the interface of the cable for the bidirectional communication between
ODU and IDU, and implement the IF section of the mo-demodulator. The power supply units of the IDU
process the battery voltage and supply power to the circuits of IDU and ODU. The controller section of the
radio contains the interfaces of the service channels, stores the firmware of the IDU, interfaces the SIAE
management systems through dedicated supervision ports and forwards external and internal alarms to
the relay contacts.

5.4.3 Modular IDU Plus

The Modular IDU Plus is made up of the following versions:


• terminal 1+0 and 1+1, 2/4/5/8/10/16/21/32xE1 capacity, 1 unit high

• terminal 1+0 and 1+1, 2/4/5/8/10/16/21/32/42/53xE1 capacity, 2 unit high

• terminal 1+0 and 1+1, 2/4/5/8/10/16/21/24xE1 + 4x10/100BaseT, 1 unit high

• drop-insert 1+0, 1+1, 4x(1+0), up to 4x53xE1 capacity, that is passthrough up to 212xE1 streams
plus drop-insert up to 32xE1 or up to 53xE1 or up to 79xE1 with STM1+16xE1 interface, equipped
with matrix into 2 units

• nodal, up to 3xModular IDU Plus can be joined in a mode giving full switching capabilities to all the
E1 streams coming from max 12 directions. Any direction can contain max 53xE1.

1 unit Modular IDU Plus consists of LIM 32E1, Eq. Controller, RIM plug-in inserted into a wired shelf.

2 unit Modular IDU Plus consists of Eq. Controller modules, LIM 32E1 or Matrix with 32E1, or Matrix with
STM1 and 16E1, one Processor for two ODU.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


23
The LIM module interfaces the in/out tributaries and, through a multiplexing (demultiplexing) and bit in-
sertion (bit extraction) process, supplies (receives) the aggregate signal to the modulator (from the de-
modulator). In addition the LIM performs the digital processing of the QAM modulator and duplicates the
main signals at the Tx side and performs the changeover at the receive side in the 1+1 version.
The Matrix and the processor perform LIM Plus drop/insert of each E1 stream coming from/to 4 directions
(12 direction for a Nodal configuration).

The RIM contains:

• the IF section of the 4QAM/16QAM programmable modemodulator or 32QAM;

• the power supply unit that processes the battery voltage to supply power to the IDU circuits and
send the battery voltage towards the ODU

• the cable interface for the bidirectional communication between IDU and ODU via interconnecting
cable.

The Controller performs the following:

• interfaces the service signals as 1x9600 bit/s or 2x4800 bit/s, 64 kbit/s, E1 WS (details are given
in the system technical specification)

• contains the equipment software that permits to control and to manage all the equipment function-
ality through a main controller and associated peripherals distributed within IDU and ODU

• interfaces the SCT/LCT management system through Ethernet, RS232 and USB ports

• receive external alarms and route them to relay contact along with the internal alarms generated
by the equipment.

5.4.4 IDU Plus Compact Unit (5.4.4)

The IDU Plus Compact unit is available in the following hardware versions:

• 1 unit for IDU Plus compact rack, configuration 1+0, 2/4/8/16/32xE1 + 3ETH

• 1 unit for IDU Plus compact rack, configuration 1+1, 2/4/8/16/32xE1 + 3ETH

The compact IDU Plus are made by a single card.

The line interfaces contain the connections of the tributaries and, by means of processes of multiplexing/
demultiplexing and of bit insertion/extraction, provide/receive the aggregate signal to/from the modulator/
demodulator. The line interfaces realize the digital processing for the QAM modulator and, in 1+1 config-
uration, duplicate the main signals on the transmission side and execute the switch on the reception side.
The interfaces to the ODU contain the interface of the cable for the bidirectional communication between
ODU and IDU, and implement the IF section of the mo-demodulator. The power supply units of the IDU
process the battery voltage and supply power to the circuits of IDU and ODU. The controller section of the
radio contains the interfaces of the service channels, stores the firmware of the IDU, interfaces the SIAE
management systems through dedicated supervision ports and forwards external and internal alarms to
the relay contacts.

5.4.5 ODU

The ODU unit contains circuits that permit to interface from one side the IDU and the antenna from the
other side.

The QAM modulated carrier is shifted to RF frequency bands through a double conversion.

Similarly it occurs at the receive side to send the IF converted carrier to the demodulator within the IDU.

The ODU unit is available in two different versions: AL and AS.

The ODU AS is also called “Universal” because it can be used as SDH ODU in Siae ALS (SIAE SDH link fam-
ily).

Antenna coupling is performed through a balanced or unbalanced hybrid system.

24
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
5.5 MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

AL different equipment can be locally and remotely controlled via a dedicated application software called
SCT/LCT running on PC.

It provides a friendly graphic interface complying with current standard use of keyboard, mouse, windows
and so on.

5.5.1 Hardware platform

The hardware platform used by SCT/LCT is based on personal computer having at least following charac-
teristics:

• microprocessor Pentium 133 MHz

• 32 Mbyte RAM

• windows compatible graphic monitor

• floppy drive 1.44 Mb


• HD with 50 Mbyte of free space

• Windows 95/Windows NT/Windows 98/Windows 2000/Windows XP.

5.5.2 Management ports

The SCT/LCT program is connected to the equipment via the following communication ports:
• Q3 (Ethernet LAN 10BaseT)

• RS232 (asynchronous serial line)

• LCT (USB)
• Embedded Overhead Channel (EOC) embedded into the radio frame.

• Embedded Overhead Channel (EOC) embedded into a 16 kbit/s or 4x16 kbit/s time slot of one of
the 2 Mbit/s tributary signals.

5.5.3 Protocols

SNMP along with IP or OSI protocol stacks are used to reach and manage the equipment operation.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


25
Fig.6 - 1+1 ODU typical configuration with integrated antenna

LIM MODULE RIM1 MODULE

RIM 1
RIM 2
FAIL

1 UNITA'
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
IDU ODU
11 12
TX RX
13 14 15 16
-
RIM 1
1 WAY
+ +

A R
Q3 SIDE RIM 2
2
REM TEST
LCT USER IN/OUT RS232 CH1 CH2 2Mb/s
-

IDU - 1+1 - 2x2 - 4x2 - 8x2 - 16x2 Mb/s


CONTROLLER MODULE
RIM2 MODULE

Fig.7 - 1+1 Modular IDU – up to 16x2 Mbit/s capacity

10-100 BaseT DPX 48V


RIM 1
FAIL RIM 2
+

LINK ACT
Trib: 1-8 Trib: 9-16
IDU ODU
1 2
TX RX
3 4
48V
-
A R 1 WAY RIM 1
Q3 2 SIDE
RIM 2
+

REM TEST
LCT RS232 USER IN/OUT CH1 CH2 2Mb/s -

Fig.8 - 1+1 Modular IDU - up to 16x2 Mbit/s capacity with 4x10/100BaseT ports

DPLX DPLX DPLX


LINK 1 LINK 2 LINK 3
ACT ACT ACT
10/100 BTX 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
TXRX PS1
TEST 1
1 2 1 2
R AL 2
Q3 LCT USER IN/OUT PS2
48V1 – – 48V2
+

Fig.9 - Compact IDU - up to 16x2 Mbit/s with 3x10/100BaseT ports

26
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Q3/2 Q3/1 IDU ODU
A R WAY
SIDE
REM TEST

+
LCT RS232 USER IN/OUT CH1 CH2 2Mb/s
-
FAIL

+
Trib: 1-8 Trib: 9-16 Trib: 17-24 Trib: 25-32
-

FAIL
Trib: 33-40 Trib: 41-48 Trib: 49-53

Fig.10 - Modular IDU PLUS 1+0/1+1 - up to 53x2 Mbit/s capacity

10-100 BaseT DPX 48V

FAIL

+
LINK ACT
Trib: 1-8 Trib: 9-16
Q3/2
Trib: 17-24
Q3/1 IDUODU
1 2 3 4 -
A R WAY
SIDE

+
REM TEST
LCT RS232 USER IN/OUT CH1 CH2 2Mb/s
-

Fig.11 - Modular IDU Plus 1+1 - up to 24x2 Mbit/s capacity and 4x10/100BaseT ports

Q3/2 Q3/1 IDU ODU 48V


A R WAY
SIDE
REM TEST

+
LCT RS232 USER IN/OUT CH1 CH2 2Mb/s
-
FAIL

NBUS ON ON 48V

FAIL

+
Trib: 1-8 2MHz 1 2 1 STM1 2 Trib: 9-16
-
FAIL

Fig.12 - Modular IDU Plus nodal with matrix - up to 16x2 Mbit/s and 1xSTM-1 capacity

V11 RS232 Trib. 17-24 Trib. 25-32 DPX


1 2 3
ACT LINK
10/100 BaseT
TX RX PS
TEST 1 1
1 2 1 2
R AL 2 2
1 2
+

Q3/2 Q3/1 LCT USER IN/OUT Trib. 1-8 Trib. 9-16 M 3.15A 250VAC - 48VDC 48VDC - M 3.15A 250VAC

Fig.13 - Compact IDU PLUS 1+1 (32E1 + 3ETH)

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


27
6 EQUIPMENT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

6.1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

- Frequency range see attachment

- RF channelling see attachment

- Go–return frequency see attachment

- Antenna configuration see attachment

- Frequency stability see attachment

- Spurious transmission see attachment

- Modulation see attachment

- Demodulation Coherent

- Output power see attachment

- Rx threshold see attachment

- Additional losses in Tx and Rx for 1+1 version see attachment

- BER see attachment

- Max RF level in Rx for BER10-3 see attachment

- Power supply see attachment


- Consumption see attachment

6.2 SERVICE CHANNELS

- Capacity of the service channels in the Modular IDU.

The following service channels are available for each type of configuration:

• version 1+0/1+1 - 2x2, 4x2, 8x2, 16x2, 34, 2x34 Mbit/s (1 unit)

Three service channels available subdivided as follows:


- interface V28 data channel 1x9600 with digital party line or 2x4800 baud or data channel sync./
async. RS232C 9600 baud

- co/contradirectional interface V11 64 kbit/s

- 2 Mbit/s wayside interface for capacities greater or equal to 16x2 Mbit/s

• version 1+0/1+1 high capacity - 32x2 Mbit/s (2 units)

Three service channels:


- interface V28 data channel 1x9600 baud with digital party line or 2x4800 baud or data channel
syncr./async. RS232C 9600 baud

- V11 co/contradirectional 64 kbit/s interface

- 2 Mbit/s wayside interface for capacities greater than 16xE1

28
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
• version 1+0/1+1 AL Ethernet 100 Mbit/s Modular (1 unit)

Three service channels:

- interface V.28 data channel 1x9600 baud with digital party or 2x4800 baud or data channel
sync./async. RS232C 9600 baud
- 2 x interfaces 2 Mbit/s wayside available on LIM as tributary 3 and 4.

- Capacity of the (optional) service channels in the IDU Compact

The following capacity of the service channel is available

• 1+0/1+1 - version 2x2, 4x2, 8x2, 16x2 Mbit/s (1 unit)

One service channel is available: interface 64 kbit/s V11 co/contradirectional

• 1+0/1+1 version 3xEthernet + 16x2 Mbit/s, no service channel

- Capacity of the service channel in the Modular IDU Plus


Three service channels are available:

- interface V28 data channel 1x9600 baud with digital party line or 2x4800 or synchronous (or
asynchronous) data channel
- V11 64 kbit/s contradirectional or 64 kbit/s codirectional interface

- 2 Mbit/s wayside interface for capacities greater or equal to 16xE1 (only for hierarchic capaci-
ties).

- Capacities of the service channels for the IDU Compact Plus

Two service channels are available:

• V11 and RS232

- V11 or, in alternative, V28 interface; V11 64 kbit/s contradirectional or codirectional interface;
interface V28 data channel 1x9600 baud with digital party line or 2x4800 baud or V.24 9600
baud synchronous (or asynchronous) data channel
- RS232 PPP interface for forwarding of the supervision signal

• an additional external EOW module is available, connected to the IDU Compact Plus to the ports
V11 and RS232.

6.3 TRANSMISSION CAPACITY

- Transmission capacity Modular IDU

- LIM 16xE1/2xE3 64 Mbit/s


- LIM 4xE1+3ETH 104 Mbit/s (see Tab.2)

- LIM 16xE1+4ETH 104 Mbit/s (see Tab.2)

- LIM D/I up to 64 Mbit/s in ring with D/I up to 16xE1

Tab.2 - Ethernet traffic capacity according to the number of used E1

Available Ethernet band


Capacity/modulation Channel spacing (MHz) Used E1
(Mbit/s)

2 –
4 Mbit/s 4QAM 3.5 1 2
– 4

4 –
8 Mbit/s 16QAM 3.5 2 4
– 8

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


29
4 –
8 Mbit/s 4QAM 7 2 2
– 8

4 8
16 Mbit/s 16QAM 7
– 16

4 8
16 Mbit/s 4QAM 14
– 16

4+1 24
32 Mbit/s 16QAM 14
1 32

4+1 24
32 Mbit/s 4QAM 28
1 32

4+1 56
64 Mbit/s 16QAM 28
1 64

100 Mbit/s 32QAM 28 2 100

100 Mbit/s 32QAM 28 4 95

- Transmission capacity Compact IDU

- Compact IDU up to 16xE1 32 Mbit/s

- Compact IDU up to 16xE1+3ETH 64 Mbit/s

- Transmission capacity (Compact Modular IDU Plus)


- Up to 53x2 Mbit/s with or
without Ethernet traffic see Tab.3

Tab.3 - Transmission capacity Modular IDU Plus

Capacity Modulation Channelling Size

2x2 Mbit/s 4QAM


4x2 Mbit/s 16QAM 3,5 MHz 1RU
5x2 Mbit/s 16QAM

4x2 Mbit/s 4QAM


5x2 Mbit/s 4QAM
7 MHz 1RU
8x2 Mbit/s 16QAM
10x2 Mbit/s 16QAM

8x2 Mbit/s 4QAM


10x2 Mbit/s 4QAM
14 MHz 1RU
16x2 Mbit/s 16QAM
21x2 Mbit/s 16QAM

16x2 Mbit/s 4QAM


21x2 Mbit/s 4QAM 28 MHz 1RU
32x2 Mbit/s 16QAM

42x2 Mbit/s 16QAM


28 MHz 2RU
53x2 Mbit/s 32QAM

- Transmission capacity (Compact IDU Plus)


- Up to 53x2 Mbit/s with or
without Ethernet traffic 105 Mbit/s

30
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
6.4 POWER SUPPLY, CONSUMPTION AND MECHANICAL CHARAC-
TERISTICS

- Terminal fully equipped power consumption see attachment

- IDU consumption see Tab.4

Tab.4 - IDU consumption

IDU type Configuration Dissipation (W)

AL Compact 1RU 1+0 ≤11

AL Compact 1RU 1+1 ≤12

AL Compact PLUS 1+0 ≤13


AL Compact PLUS 1+1 ≤16

AL Modular 1RU 1+0 ≤17

AL Modular 1RU 1+1 ≤ 22

AL Modular 2RU 1+0 ≤ 21

AL Modular 2RU 1+1 ≤ 25

AL Modular 2RU 2x(1+0) ≤ 28


1+0 ≤ 17
AL Modular Plus 1RU
1+1 ≤ 23

AL Modular Plus 2RU D&I 2x(1+0) ≤ 35


32xE1 4x(1+0) ≤ 45

1+0 ≤ 25
AL Plus, 2RU, 53xE1
1+1 ≤ 35

Compact Plus 1RU 32xE1 1+0 ≤ 13


+3ETH 1+1 ≤ 18

- Fuses for Modular IDU


as protection of power supply circuits of whole equipment, there is a F1 fuse on the RIM PCB behind
front panel. The fuse characteristics are:
- Nominal current 3A

- Nominal voltage 125 Vdc/ac

- Type timed

- Dimensions 6.10 mm x 2.59 mm

- Fuses for IDU Plus


as protection of power supply circuits of whole equipment, there is a F1 fuse on the RIM PCB behind
front panel. The fuse characteristics are:

- Nominal current 3A

- Nominal voltage 125 Vdc/ac


- Type timed

- Dimensions 6.10 mm x 2.59 mm

- Fuses for Compact IDU


On the IDU Compact front panel there are fuses with following characteristics:

- Nominal current 3.15A

- Nominal voltage 250 Vdc/ac

- Type Medium timed

- Dimensions 5 mm x 20 mm

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


31
- Fuses for IDU Compact Plus On the IDU Compact Plus front panel there are
fuses with following characteristics:

- Nominal current 3.15A

- Nominal voltage 250 Vdc/ac

- Type Medium timed

- Dimensions 5 mm x 20 mm

- Environmental conditions

- IDU operating range from -5° to +45° C

- ODU operating range from -33° to +55°C

- IDU survival temperature range from -10°C to +55° C

- ODU survival temperature range from -40°C to +60°C


- ODU operating humidity 95% at +35°C

- ODU operating humidity in accordance with IP65

- ODU dissipation thermal resistance0.5°C/W


solar heat gain ≤ 5°C

- Wind speed ≤ 220 km/h

- Storage conditions according to T.1.2 ETSI EN 300 019-1-1 (weather


protected, not temperature cpntrolled storage
locations)

Tab.5 - Guaranteed current absorbition for power supply connector

Configuration Imax

Modular IDU ≤ 1.13 A

High capacity Modular IDU ≤ 1.23 A

Compact IDU ≤1A

IDU PLus ≤ 1.25 A

Compact IDU Plus ≤ 1.20 A

- Technical characteristics see Tab.6

Tab.6 - IDU/ODU dimensions

Width (mm) Height (mm) Depth (mm)

ODU AL 1+0 254 254 114

ODU AL 1+1 278 254 296

ODU AS 1+0 254 254 121

ODU AS 1+1 358 254 296

IDU Modular 1+0/1+1, up to 16x2, up to 2x34 Mb/s 480 45 270

IDU Modular 1+0/1+1 32x2 Mbit/s 480 90 270

IDU Modular 2+0 east/west repeater 480 90 270

IDU Modular Plus 32E1 480 45 270

IDU Modular Plus 53E1 480 90 270

IDU Modular Plus drop-insert 480 90 270

IDU Compact 1+0/1+1 480 45 213

IDU Compact Plus 1+0/1+1 480 45 270

- Weight refer to Tab.7

32
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Tab.7 - IDU/ODU weight

ODU AL 1+0 4.5 kg

ODU AL 1+1 13.3 kg

ODU AS 1+0 5.5 kg

ODU AS 1+1 15.3 kg

IDU Modular 1+0/1+1, up to 16x2, up to 2x34 Mbit/s 3.5/3.7 kg

IDU Modular 1+0/1+1 32x2 Mbit/s 3.5/3.7 kg

IDU Modular 2+0 east/west repeater 3.7 kg

IDU Compact 1+0/1+1 2.5/2.6 kg

IDU Compact Plus 1+0/1+1 2.5/2.6 kg

Panning system 1+0/1+1 4.4 kg

- Mechanical layout refer to typical Fig.14 to Fig.33.

RIM1
FAIL RIM2

1 UNITA'
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
IDU ODU TX RX
13 14 15 16 -
WAY RIM1
A R 1

+ +
Q3 2 SIDE RIM2
REM TEST
LCT USER IN/OUT RS232 CH1 CH2 2Mb/s -
IDU - 1+1 - 2x2 - 4x2 - 8x2 - 16x2 Mb/s

Fig.14 - 1+1 IDU Modular configuration – Micro coaxial tributary connectors

A B C D
DPLX DPLX DPLX
1 2 3 RIM 1
FAIL LINK LINK LINK
ACT ACT ACT RIM 2

IDU ODU TX RX
10/100 BTX
-
1 WAY
+ +

A R RIM 1
Q3 2 SIDE
RIM 2
REM TEST
LCT USER IN/OUT RS232 CH1 CH2 2Mb/s -

Fig.15 - 1+1 IDU Modular – Ethernet tributary connectors

2Mb/s 2Mb/s 2Mb/s 2Mb/s RIM1


FAIL RIM2

1 UNITA'
Trib: A-B-C-D Trib: E-F-G-H Trib: I-J-K-L
IDUODU TX RX
Trib: M-N-O-P -
WAY RIM1
A R 1
+ +

Q3 2 SIDE RIM2
REM TEST
LCT USER IN/OUT RS232 CH1 CH2 2Mb/s -

Fig.16 - 1+1 IDU Modular – D type tributary connectors

1 2
RIM 1
FAIL RIM 2

-
+ +

IDU ODU TX RX
A R 1 WAY RIM 1
Q3 2 SIDE
RIM 2
REM TEST
LCT USER IN/OUT RS232 CH1 CH2 2Mb/s
-

Fig.17 - 1+1 Modular IDU (34, 2x34 Mbit/s)

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


33
RIM 1
FAIL RIM 2
11
1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 13 14 15 16
-

+ + +
4

RIM 1
FAIL RIM 2
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
-

IDU ODU TX RX
A R 1 WAY
Q3 2 SIDE
REM TEST
LCT USER IN/OUT RS232 CH1 CH2 2Mb/s

Fig.18 - 1+1 Modular IDU high capacity configuration – Micro coaxial tributary connectors

2Mb/s 2Mb/s 2Mb/s 2Mb/s


RIM 1
FAIL RIM 2
Trib: 1-2-3-4 Trib: 5-6-7-8 Trib: 9-10-11-12 Trib: 13-14-15-16
-
2Mb/s 2Mb/s 2Mb/s 2Mb/s

+
RIM 1
FAIL RIM 2
Trib: 17-18-19-20 Trib: 21-22-23-24 Trib: 25-26-27-28 Trib: 29-30-31-32 -

+
IDU ODU TX RX
A R 1 WAY
Q3 2 SIDE
REM TEST
LCT USER IN/OUT RS232 CH1 CH2 2Mb/s

Fig.19 - 1+1 Modular IDU high capacity configuration – D type tributary connectors

FAIL

+
Trib: 1-8 Trib: 9-16
Q3/2 Q3/1
Trib: 17-24
IDU ODU
Trib: 25-32
-
A R WAY
SIDE

+
REM TEST
LCT RS232 USER IN/OUT CH1 CH2 2Mb/s
-

Fig.20 - IDU Modular Plus 1U - 32x2 Mbit/s

Q3/2 Q3/1 IDU ODU


A R WAY
SIDE
REM TEST
LCT RS232 USER IN/OUT CH1 CH2 2Mb/s
-
+

FAIL

-
+

NBUS ON ON

FAIL
Trib: 1-8 2MHz 1 STM1 2 Trib: 9-16
-
+

1 2

FAIL

-
+

Fig.21 - IDU Modular Plus 1+1 2U - 16x2 Mbit/s + STM1 nodal 4+0

Q3/2 Q3/1 IDU ODU


A R WAY
SIDE
REM TEST
+

LCT RS232 USER IN/OUT CH1 CH2 2Mb/s


-
FAIL
+

Trib: 1-8 Trib: 9-16 Trib: 17-24 Trib: 25-32


-

FAIL
Trib: 33-40 Trib: 41-48 Trib: 49-53

Fig.22 IDU Modular Plus 1+1 2U (up to 53x2 Mbit/s)

Trib. 1–2–3–4

Q3 LCT USER IN/OUT 48V


PS
TEST
R AL
Trib. 5–6–7–8

+

Fig.23 - IDU Compact 1+0 (2x2/4x2 Mbit/s)

34
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Trib. 1–2–3–4 Trib. 9–10–11–12

Q3 LCT USER IN/OUT 48V1 48V2


TX RX PS1
TEST 1
1 2 1 2
R AL 2
Trib. 5–6–7–8 Trib. 13–14–15–16 PS2
– –

+
Fig.24 - IDU Compact 1+1 (2x2/4x2/8x2/16x2 Mbit/s)

DPLX DPLX DPLX


2 3
LINK 1 LINK LINK
ACT ACT ACT
10/100 BTX 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
TXRX PS1
TEST 1
1 2 1 2
R AL 2
Q3 LCT USER IN/OUT PS2
48V1 – – 48V2

+
Fig.25 - IDU Compact 1+1 (coax. connector up to 16x2 Mbit/s) + Ethernet module

V11 RS232 Trib. 17-24 Trib. 25-32 DPX


1 2 3
ACT LINK
10/100 BaseT
TX RX PS
TEST 1 1
1 2 1 2
R AL 2 2
1 2

+
Q3/2 Q3/1 LCT USER IN/OUT Trib. 1-8 Trib. 9-16 M 3.15A 250VAC - 48VDC 48VDC - M 3.15A 250VAC

Fig.26 - IDU Compact Plus 1+1 (32E1 + 3ETH)

V11 RS232 Trib. 17-24 Trib. 25-32 DPX


1 2 3
ACT LINK
10/100 BaseT
TX RX PS
TEST 1 1
1 2 1 2
R AL 2 2
1 2
+

Q3/2 Q3/1 LCT USER IN/OUT Trib. 1-8 Trib. 9-16 M 3.15A 250VAC - 48VDC 48VDC - M 3.15A 250VAC

Fig.27 - IDU Compact Plus 1+0 (16E1)

Fig.28 - 1+0 ODU AL with separated antenna (pole mounting)

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


35
Fig.29 - 1+1 ODU AL with separated antenna

Fig.30 - 1+0 ODU AL with integral antenna (pole mounting)

36
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Fig.31 - 1+1 ODU AL with integral antenna (pole mounting)

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


37
Fig.32 - 1+1 ODU AL with separated antenna (wall mounting)

38
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Fig.33 - ODU AS 1+1 with separated antenna

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


39
7 CHARACTERISTICS OF THE INDOOR UNIT

7.1 GENERAL

The following IDU characteristics are guaranteed for the temperature range from –5° C to +45° C.

7.2 TRIBUTARY INTERFACE

7.2.1 2 Mbit/s interface

Input side

- Bit rate 2048 kbit/s ±50 ppm


- Line code HDB3

- Rated impedance 75 Ohm or 120 Ohm

- Rated level 2.37 Vp/75 Ohm or 3 Vp/120 Ohm


- Return loss 12 dB from 57 kHz to 102 kHz
18 dB from 102 kHz to 2048 kHz
14 dB from 2048 kHz to 3072 kHz
- Max attenuation of the input cable 6 dB according to f trend
- Accepted jitter see mask in Table 2, CCITT Rec. G.823

- Transfer function see mask in Figure 1, CCITT Rec. G.742


- Connector type 1.0/2.3, SUB–D 25 pins, SCSI 50 pin

Output side

- Bit rate 2048 kbit/s ±50 ppm

- Rated impedance 75 Ohm or 120 Ohm

- Rated level 2.37 Vp/75 Ohm or 3 Vp/120 Ohm


- Output jitter in accordance with G.742/G.823

- Pulse shape see mask in Figure 15, CCITT Rec. G.703

- Connector type 1.0/2.3, SUB–D 25 pins, SCSI 50 pin

40
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
7.2.2 34 Mbit/s interface

Input side

- Bit rate 34368 kbit/s ±20 ppm

- Line code HDB3

- Rated impedance 75 Ohm

- Rated level 1.0 Vp/75 Ohm

- Return loss 12 dB from 860 kHz to 17200 kHz


18 dB from 17200 kHz to 34368 kHz
14 dB from 34368 kHz to 51550 kHz

- Max attenuation of the input cable 12 dB at 17184 kHz according to f trend


- Accepted jitter see mask in Table 2, CCITT Rec. G.823

- Transfer function in accordance with G.823

- Connector type 1.0/2.3

Output side

- Bit rate 34368 kbit/s ±20 ppm

- Rated impedance 75 Ohm


- Output jitter 0.3 U.I. from 0 Hz to 800 kHz
0.05 U.I. from 10 kHz to 800 kHz

- Rated level 1.0 Vp/75 Ohm


- Pulse shape see mask in Figure 17, CCITT Rec. G.703

- Connector type 1.0/2.3

7.2.3 Ethernet interface

- Ethernet characteristics IEEE 802.3 (10/100BaseT connector RJ45,


100/1000BaseX connector LC)

- Ethernet switch functionalities MAC switching


MAC learning
MAC Aging
IEEE 802.1q VLAN
IEEE 802.1x Flow Control
IEEE 802.1p QoS
IP–V4 ToS
IP-V6 TC/DSCP

7.3 STM-1 INTERFACE

The STM-1 interface can be specialized for different applications, by simply equipping the STM-1 interface
with the appropriate pluggable optical or electrical transceiver. Optical interface has LC connectors. Electric
interface has 1.0/2.3 connectors. Information about the presence/absence and type of transceiver is trans-
ferred to the main controller. The characteristics of all the possible optical interfaces are summarized in
the Tab.8.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


41
Tab.8 - Optical interface characteristics

Launched Minimum
Operating Distance
Interface Ref. power sensitivity Transceiver Fibre
wavelength (km)
(dBm) (dBm)

Single-
L-1.2 G.957 0 ... -5 -34 1480-1580 Laser Up to 80
Mode

Single-
L-1.1 G.957 0 ... -5 -34 1263-1360 Laser Up to 40
Mode

Single-
S-1.1 G.957 -8 ... -15 -28 1263-1360 Laser Up to 15
Mode

I-1 ANSI -14 ... -20 -28 1263-1360 Led MultiMode Up to 2

The LIM is provided with Automatic Laser Shutdown as prescribed by ITU-T G.664 Recommendation.

7.3.1 Characteristics of STM-1 electrical interface

Input side

- Bit rate 155520 kbit/s ±4,6 ppm

- Line code CMI


- Rated impedance 75 ohm

- Rated level 1 Vpp ±0,1 V

- Return loss ≥ 15 dB from 8 MHz to 240 MHz

- Max attenuation of the input cable 12,7 dB at 78 MHz ( f law)

Output side

- Bit rate 155520 kbit/s ±4,6 ppm

- Rated level 1 Vpp ±0,1 V

- Pulse shape see mask of Figure 24 and 25 of ITU-T


Rec. G.703

42
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
7.4 SERVICE CHANNEL INTERFACE

7.4.1 2 Mbit/s wayside interface

Input side

- Bit rate 2048 kbit/s ±50 ppm

- Line code HDB3

- Rated impedance 75 Ohm or 120 Ohm

- Rated level 2.37 Vp/75 Ohm or 3 Vp/120 Ohm


- Return loss 12 dB from 57 kHz to 102 kHz
18 dB from 102 kHz to 2048 kHz
14 dB from 2048 kHz to 3072 kHz
- Max attenuation of the input cable 6 dB according to f trend
- Accepted jitter see mask in Table 2, CCITT Rec. G.823

- Transfer function see mask in Figure 1, CCITT Rec. G.742

- Connector RJ45 (in/out in commun)

Output side

- Bit rate 2048 kbit/s ±50 ppm

- Rated impedance 75 Ohm or 120 Ohm

- Rated level 2.37 Vp/75 Ohm or 3 Vp/120 Ohm

- Pulse shape see mask in Figure 15, CCITT Rec. G.703

- Output jitter in accordance with G.742/G.823

- Connector RJ45 (in/out in commun)

7.4.2 64 kbit/s co–directional interface

- Tolerance ±100 ppm

- Coding synch + data + octet as per G.703

- Impedance 120 Ohm

- Max attenuation of the input cable 3 dB at 128 kHz

- User side see CCITT Rec. G.703

- Input/output level 1 Vp/120 Ohm ±0.1 V


- Return loss see tables at par. 1.2.1.3 in CCITT Rec. G.703

- Connector RJ45

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


43
7.4.3 64 kbit/s contra–directional interface V.11

- Tolerance ±100 ppm

- Equipment side contra–directional

- Coding clock and data on independent wires

- Electrical interface see Rec. CCITT V.11

- Connector RJ45

7.4.4 Analogue interface

- Electrical characteristics as per Recc. G.712

- Input level from –14 dBr to +1 dBr/600 Ohm

- Output level from –11 dBr to +4 dBr/600 Ohm

7.4.5 9600 bit/s low speed synchronous/asynchronous data

- Data interface RS232

- Electrical interface CCITT Rec. V.28

- Input speed 9600 baud

- Control wires DTR, DSR, DCD

- Connector RJ45

7.4.6 9600 or 2x4800 bit/s low speed asynchronous data

- Electrical interface CCITT Rec. V.28

- Input speed 4800 or 9600 bit/s

- Electrical interface V.28

- Connector RJ45

7.4.7 Alarm interface

User output

- Relay contacts normally open (NO) or normally closed (NC)


- Open contacts Rmin 100 Mohm at 500 Vdc

- Closed contacts Rmax 0.5 Ohm

- Switching voltage Vmax 100 V

- Switching current Imax 1A

- Connector SUB-D 9 pin

44
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
User input

- Equivalent circuit recognized as a closed contact 200 Ohm resist. (max) referred to ground

- Equivalent circuit recognized as an open contact 60 kOhm (min) referred to ground

- Connector SUB-D 9 pin

7.4.8 Network Management Interface

RJ45 interface

- LAN type Ethernet Twisted Pair 802.3 10BaseT

- Connector RJ45

- Connection to LAN direct with a CAT5 Twisted Pair

- Protocol TCP/IP or IPoverOSI

BNC interface

- LAN type Ethernet thinnet 802.3 10Base2


- Connector BNC

- Connection to LAN RG58 coax. cable 50 Ohm

- Protocol TCP/IP or IPoverOSI

RS232 interface

- Electrical interface V.28


- Asynchronous baud rate 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600

- Protocol PPP

LCT RS232 interface

- Electrical interface V.28

- Asynchronous baud rate 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600


- Protocol PPP

LCT USB interface

- Electrical interface USB 1.1 version

- Baud rate 1.5 Mbit/s

- Protocol PPP

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


45
7.5 MODULATOR/DEMODULATOR

- Carrier IF mo-demodulating frequency

- Tx side 330 MHz

- Rx side 140 MHz


- Type of modulation 4QAM/16QAM/32QAM

- Type of coding BCM

- Modulating signal from 4 Mbit/s to 106 Mbit/s depending on


different capacities

- Equalization 5 taps

- Coding gain 2.5 dB at 10–6


1 dB at 10–3

7.6 CABLE INTERFACE

- Interconnection with the ODU unit single coaxial cable for both Tx and Rx

- Cable length ODU AL: 370 m 4/16/32QAM


ODU AS: 300 m 4/16/32QAM

- Rated impedance 50 Ohm

- Signal running along the cable

- Tx nominal frequency 330 MHz

- Rx nominal frequency 140 MHz

- Transceiver management signals 388 kbit/s bidirectional

- Remote power supply direct from battery voltage

7.7 AVAILABLE LOOPS

The following loop are available within the IDU:

• line tributary loop

• internal tributary loop

• baseband loop

• IDU loop.

46
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
8 DESCRIPTION OF THE MODULAR IDU FOR 2 OR
34 MBIT/S TRIBUTARIES

8.1 1+0/1+1 MODULAR IDU VERSION

Description that follows is referring to LIM/CONTROLLER/RIM module the Modular IDU consists of.

8.1.1 LIM

The LIM performs the following operations:

• multiplexing process of the input tributaries


• aggregation of the multiplexed signals along with services through a Bit Insertion circuit

• processing in digital form of the baseband part of the QAM modulator (the IF part of the QAM mod-
ulator takes place within the RIM

• duplication of the digital processed signal to supply two RIMs in 1+1 versions. In the full duplicated
version the changeover occurs at tributary level.

Different baseband structures and digital processing of the signal to be forwarded to the QAM modulator/
demodulator is produced by a “chip set”. Controls to the chip set and status/alarm reporting from the chip
set are given/received by main controller within the CONTROLLER module.

8.1.2 Circuit description

Tx side

Refer to Fig.34.

The 2/34 Mbit/s input signal is code converted from HDB3 to NRZ format before being multiplexed. The
multiplexing scheme depends on the number and the bit rate of the input tributaries.

Attached figures show different multiplexing scheme as follows:

• Fig.35 – 2/34 Mbit/s single tributary multiplexing. The mux performs stuffing operation and gener-
ates a proprietary frame to be sent to the Bit Insertion. Opposite operation occurs at the Rx side.

• Fig.36 – 2x2 Mbit/s multiplexing. The mux performs stuffing operation on each single tributary and
generates a proprietary frame embedding the two tributaries to be sent to the Bit Insertion. Oppo-
site operation occurs at the Rx side.

• Fig.37 – 4x2 Mbit/s multiplexing. The mux aggregates the four 2 Mbit/s tributaries generating a
8448 kbit/s frame as per Recc. G.742. The multiplexed signal is then sent to the Bit Insertion. Op-
posite operation occurs at the Rx side.

• Fig.38 – 8x2 Mbit/s multiplexing. The eight 2 Mbit/s tributaries are grouped in two 4x2 Mbit/s groups
each of one generating a G742 frame structure at 8448 kbit/s to be sent to the next Bit Insertion.
Opposite operation occurs at the Rx side.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


47
• Fig.39 – 16x2 Mbit/s multiplexing. The sixteen 2 Mbit/s tributaries are grouped in four 4x2 Mbit/s
groups each of one generating a G.742 frame structure at 8448 kbit/s. A further multiplexing of the
achieved four 8448 kbit/s streams will generate a frame structure at 34368 kbit/s as per Recc.
G.751. This latter is to be sent to the Bit Insertion.The 2 Mbit/s wayside undergoes stuffing process
before being sent to the Bit Insertion. Opposite operation occurs at the Rx side.

• Fig.40 – 32x2 Mbit/s multiplexing. This version consisted of two LIMs (master and slave) each of
one manipulating two 16x2 Mbit/s signals. Each of one will generate a 34368 kbit/s frame structure
as per Recc. G.751.
The two signals are sent to the Bit Insertion within the master LIM for aggregation and stuffing proc-
ess. The 2 Mbit/s wayside undergoes stuffing process before being sent to the B.I. Opposite oper-
ation occurs at the Rx side.

• Fig.41 – 2x34 Mbit/s multiplexing. The two 34368 kbit/s tributaries are directly sent to the Bit In-
sertion for aggregation and stuffing process. Opposite situation occurs at the Rx side.

In addition to the tributary mux, an additional service mux is provided for aggregation of various service
signals interfaced by Controller module.

The multiplexed tributary and service signals are then sent to the B.I. for aggregate frame generation oc-
curring at the following bit rate depending on various versions implemented:

Tab.9 - Aggregate frame

Version Aggregate frame

2 Mbit/s 2430 kbit/s

2x2 Mbit/s 4860 kbit/s

4x2 Mbit/s 9720 kbit/s

8x2 Mbit/s 19440 kbit/s

16x2/34 Mbit/s 38880 kbit/s

32x2/2x34 Mbit/s 77760 kbit/s

The aggregate frame contains:

• the main signal from the MUX(s)

• the framed service signal from the service MUX


• the EOC signals for supervision message propagation towards the remote equipment

• the frame alignment word

• the bits dedicated to the FEC.

All the synch. signals to perform multiplexing (demultiplexing) and BI (BE) process are achieved from a x0
at 38.88 MHz

The LIM also includes the processing in digital form (see Fig.34) of the modulating signal to be sent to the
mixers of the QAM modulator within the RIM.

The digital process includes:

• serial to parallel conversion

• differential encoding

• generation of the shaped modulating signals I and Q to be sent to each individual RIM.

Rx side

Refer to Fig.42.

From the two RIMs the LIM is receiving the I and Q analogue signals then digital converted for the following
processing:

48
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
• clock recovery

• frequency and phase carrier locking

• baseband equalisation and filtering

• bit polarity decision

• differential decoding

• parallel to serial conversion to recover the aggregate signal at the receive side.

The aggregate signal is then sent to a frame alignment circuit and CRC analysis and then to the error cor-
rector. The errors uncorrected by the FEC are properly counted to achieve:

• BER estimate measurement

• radio performances

HBER/LBER/Early Warning Alarm roots for monitoring purpose and Rx switching operation are taken di-
rectly from CRC circuit before FEC correction.

The Rx switching receives the two aggregate signals and performs signal selection under the control of a
logic circuit according with Tab.10.

The changeover is error free and the system has built in capabilities of minimising the passed errors during
the detection time, such as the early warning criteria. The hitless switching facility provides automatic syn-
chronisation of the two incoming streams up to a dynamic difference of ± 7 bits; additionally, the switching
unit is also capable of compensating static delays between the two incoming streams of up to ±7 bits. At
the output of the Rx switch the Bit Extraction separates the main signal from the services and then, after
a proper demultiplexing process as previously described, sends them to the output interface lines.

Tab.10 - Switching priority

Priority Levels Description

Priority 1 RIM PSU Alarm


Highest
| Priority 2 Manual forcing (from main controller)
|
| Priority 3 Cable Short Alarm
|
| Priority 3 Cable Open Alarm
|
Priority 3 IF Unit Alarm
|
| Priority 3 Demodulator Failure
|
| Priority 3 Base Band Unit Failure Alarm
|
| Priority 3 ODU Unit Failure
|
| Priority 3 ODU PSU Alarm
|
Priority 3 VCO Failure Alarm
|
| Priority 3 High BER >10–3 (or 10–4 or 10–5, selectable by software)
|
| Priority 4 Low BER > 10–6 (or 10–7 or 10–8, selectable by software)
|
| Early Warning BER > 10–9 (or 10–10 or 10–11 or 10–12, select-
Priority 5
| able by software)
|
| RF Input Low (Rx threshold SW selectable from –40 to –99
Priority 6
| dBm)

Priority 7 CRC Pulse
Lowest
Priority 8 Revertive Rx (branch one preferential)

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


49
8.1.3 RIM

Refer to Fig.43.

The RIM consists of the following main circuits:

• IF part of the QAM modulator

• IF part of the QAM demodulator

• power supply

• telemetry IDU/ODU

8.1.3.1 QAM modulator

I and Q signals from LIM are connected to a 4 or 16QAM programmable modulator. It consists of the fol-
lowing circuits:

• recovery low pass filter to eliminate signal periodicity

• two mixers for carrier amplitude and phase modulation process

• 330 MHz local oscillator

• a 90° phase shifter to supply two mixers with two in quadrature carriers
• a combiner circuit to generate the QAM modulation

The thus obtained 330 MHz QAM modulated carrier is then sent to the cable interface for connection with
ODU.

8.1.3.2 QAM demodulator

At the receive side, from the cable interface, the 140 MHz QAM modulated carrier is sent to the QAM de-
modulator passing through a cable equalizer circuit. The QAM demodulator within the RIM extracts the I
and Q signals to be sent to the digital part of the demodulator within the LIM.

8.1.3.3 Power supply

The –48 V battery voltage feeds the IDU and ODU circuitry. The service voltages for the IDU feeding are
achieved through a DC/DC converter for +3.6 V generation and a step down circuit for –5V.

Both voltages are protected against overvoltages and overcurrents.

The power to the ODU is given by the same battery running through the interconnection cable.

An electronic breaker protects the battery against cable failure.

8.1.3.4 Telemetry IDU/ODU

The dialogue IDU/ODU is made–up by the main controller and associated peripherals within the ODU. Con-
trols for ODU management and alarm reporting is performed making use of a bidirectional 388 kbit/s
framed signals. The transport along the interconnecting cable is carried out via two FSK modulated carri-
ers: 17.5 MHz from IDU to ODU; 5.5 MHz from ODU to IDU.

50
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
8.1.4 CONTROLLER

The controller module performs the following:

• interfaces the service signals

• houses the equipment software for equipment management

• interfaces the SCT/LCT program through supervision ports

• receive external alarms and route them to relay contacts along with the internal alarms generated
by the equipment.

Warning: lithium battery inside, refer to national rules for disposal.

8.1.4.1 Service signals

The controller offers an electrical interface to the following three service channel options:

• 9600 baud/V28 with digital party line or in alternative 2x4800 baud/V28 – 9600 baud V28/RS232
synchronous/asynchronous channels

• 64 kbit/s/V11 codirectional or contradirectional

• 2 Mbit/s wayside G.703.

The service channels thus interfaced are then sent to the LIM for MUX/DEMUX processing.

8.1.4.2 Equipment software

Equipment software permits to control and manage all the equipment functionality. It is distributed on two
hardware levels: main controller and ODU peripheral controllers.

The dialogue between main and peripheral controllers is shown in Fig.44.

Main controller

The activities executed by the main controller are the following:


• Communication management: it makes use of SNMP as management protocol and IP or IP over OSI
as communication protocol stacks. See Fig.45 for details. The interface ports for the equipment
management are the following:

- LAN Ethernet 10BaseT/10Base2 or AUI

- USB port for 1+0 version

- RS232 asynchronous used for SCT/LCT connection

- RS232 asynchronous used for connection to further NEs

- EOC embedded within the PDH radio frame for connection to the remote NEs

- EOC embedded within the 2 Mbit/s tributary G.704 frame.

• Log–in: the main controller manages the equipment or network login/logout by setting and then
controlling the user’s ID and relevant password.

• Database (MIB): validation and storing in a non–volatile memory of the equipment configuration
parameters.

• Equipment configuration: distribution of the parameters stored in the MIB towards the peripheral
µPs for their actuation in addition to the controls from user not stored in the MIB (i.e. loops, manual
forcing etc...).

• Alarm monitoring: acquisition, filtering and correlation of the alarms gathered from slaved µPs. Lo-
cal logger and alarm sending to the connected managers: SCT/LCT – NMS5UX. Management of the
alarm signalling on the LIM front panel.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


51
• Performances: PM management as per Recc. G.828.

• Download: the main controller is equipped with two flash memory banks containing the running pro-
gram (active bank) and the stand–by program (inactive bank). This permits to download a new soft-
ware release to the inactive bank without distributing the traffic.
Bank switch enables the new release to be used.
Download activity is based on FTP protocol which downloads application programs, FPGA configu-
ration, configuration files on main controller inactive bank or directly on the peripheral controllers.

Peripheral controllers

The peripheral controllers take place within the ODU and are slaved to main controller with the task of ac-
tivating controls and alarm reporting of dedicated functionality.

8.1.4.3 Supervision ports

The equipment management is made by SCT/LCT program through the supervision ports.

The following are made available:

• LCT/RS232 interface ports using PPP protocol and baud rate speed up to 57600

• LAN interface using IP or IPoverOSI protocols


• EOC (Embedded Overhead Channel) using a 64 kbit/s slot of the radio frame to broadcast the su-
pervision messages towards the remote terminals. The protocol used is IP or IPoverOSI.

8.2 IDU LOOPS

To control the IDU correct operation a set of local and remote loops are made available. The commands
are forwarded by the LCT/SCT program. Loop block diagram is shown by Fig.46.

8.2.1 Tributary loop

Tributary local loop

Each input tributary is routed directly to the trib. output upon receiving the command from the LCT. The
Tx line transmission is still on.

Tributary remote loop

Each tributary directed towards the Rx output line is routed back to the Tx line. The Rx line is still on.

8.2.2 Baseband unit loop

This kind of loop is only local and is activated at BI/BE level. The Tx line is still on.

52
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
8.2.3

to 140 MHz.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


NRZ
BI: Digital MOD D/A I&Q
2/34 Mbit/s Code - main traffic to RIM1
G.703 converter CK - S/P convertion
- services
IDU loop

- diff. encoding
- EOC - modulating
- FEC signal I&Q
MUX - FAW D/A to RIM2
NRZ 2/2x2/4x2 generation
Code 8x2/16x2
converter CK 32x2/2x34 Frame
X0 38.88 MHz
see generator
nx2 Fig.23
. through
. Fig.29
. - FSK mod/demod
nx34 - 388 frame
NRZ generator/receiver
Code
converter CK

2 Mbit/s only (16x2/34 or


to/from main
wayside higher speed
controller

Fig.34 - LIM block diagram – Tx side


Service
services Controller channel
module module synchr.
ed to demodulator input. The loop is assured by converting the frequency of the modulator from 330 MHz
This kind of loop permits to check the full IDU operation. When activated, the modulator output is connect-

53
Aggregate Ck

Ck
MUX
2/34 Mbit/s proprietary B.I.
frame Tx data

Ck
2/34 Mbit/s DEMUX
proprietary B.E.
frame Rx data

Fig.35 - Single tributary multiplexing/demultiplexing

Aggregate Ck

Ck
MUX
2x2 Mbit/s proprietary B.I.
frame Tx data

Ck
DEMUX
2x2 Mbit/s proprietary B.E.
frame Rx data

Fig.36 - 2x2 Mbit/s multiplexing/demultiplexing

Aggregate Ck

4x2 Mbit/s
Ck

MUX 2 ->8 B.I.


G.742
Framed data
8448 Tx

4x2 Mbit/s Ck
DEMUX
2 ->8 B.E.
G.742 Framed data
8448 Rx

Fig.37 - 4x2 Mbit/s multiplexing/demultiplexing

54
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Aggregate Ck

4x2 Mbit/s
Ck

MUX 2 ->8 Data B.I.


G.742

4x2 Mbit/s

MUX 2 ->8 Framed data


G.742 8448 Tx
Data

4x2 Mbit/s Ck 8448 kHz Tx


DEMUX
Data B.E.
8 -> 2
G.742

4x2 Mbit/s
DEMUX
8 -> 2
G.742
Framed data
8448 Rx

Fig.38 - 8x2 Mbit/s multiplexing/demultiplexing

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


55
2 Mbit/s wayside Aggregate Ck
Stuffing

4x2 Mbit/s
MUX
2 ->8 B.I.
G.742

4x2 Mbit/s
MUX
2 ->8
G.742

4x2 Mbit/s Ck 34368 kHz Tx


MUX
2 ->8 Framed data 34368
G.742 kbit/s

Ck 8448 kHz Tx
4x2 Mbit/s
MUX MUX
2 ->8 8->34
G.742 G.751

Framed data
8448 kbit/s Tx

2 Mbit/s wayside Aggregate Ck


Destuffing

4x2 Mbit/s
DEMUX
8 ->2 B.E.
G.742

4x2 Mbit/s
DEMUX
8 ->2
G.742

4x2 Mbit/s Ck 34368 kHz


DEMUX
8 ->2 Framed data 34368
G.742 kbit/s

Ck 8448 kHz
4x2 Mbit/s
DEMUX MUX
8 ->2 34->8
G.742 G.751

Framed data
8448 kbit/s Tx

Fig.39 - 16x2 Mbit/s multiplexing/demultiplexing

56
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
1 set of 16x2 Mbit/s Aggregate Ck

Mux 2->8 8448 k


Demux 8->2
2 Mbit/s interface

Mux 2->8 8448 k Mux


Demux 8->2 Demux 77600 kbit/s
8->34 34368 k
BI/BE
Mux 2->8 34->8
8448 k
Demux 8->2

Mux 2->8 8448 k


Demux 8->2

LIM Master

2 set of 16x2 Mbit/s

Mux 2->8 8448 k


Demux 8->2
2 Mbit/s interface

Mux 2->8 8448 k Mux


Demux 8->2 Demux
8->34 34368 k
34->8
Mux 2->8 8448 k
Demux 8->2

Mux 2->8 8448 k


Demux 8->2

LIM Slave

Fig.40 - 32x2 multiplexing/demultiplexing

Aggregate Ck

34368 k
77600 kbit/s
BI/BE
34368 k

Fig.41 - Multiplexing/demultiplexing 2x34 Mbit/s

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


57
58
BER meas.
P.M.

A FEC
- Ck recovery
D - Carrier lock CRC
- Equaliz. & filt. analysis
I&Q
- Decision & aligner
from
- Diff. decod.
RIM1
- S/P
2/34 Mbit/s
Code G.703
converter
DEMUX
2/2x2/4x2
- BER extimates 8x2/16x2
- High BER 32x2/2x34
- Low BER See Code
SW BE Fig.23
- EW logic converter
through
Fig. 29 nx2
or nx34 Mbit/s

Code
converter
from switch

Fig.42 - LIM block diagram – Rx side


main controls
P
µ

I&Q from same as


RIM2 above
Service Services
Controller
channel
module
DEMUX

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


I&Q QAM
330 MHz
from LIM MOD
(IF part)

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


5.5 MHz
to LIM

17.5 MHz Cable


from LIM interface

Remote power supply

Overcurrent
protect.

DC

Fig.43 - RIM block diagram


battery I/V
protect +3.6 V
-48 V
DC

Step
down -5 V

I&Q

DEM
Cable
to LIM QAM
equaliz.
(IF part)

59
60
LAN RS232 LCT User In Alarm/
User Out

Main controller EOC

388 kbit/s 388 kbit/s


generator generator
receiver receiver

FSK FSK
modem modem

Fig.44 - Main and peripheral controller connection


FSK FSK
modem modem

388 kbit/s 388 kbit/s

Peripheral 388 kb/s 338 kb/s Peripheral


controller gen/rec. gen/rec. controller
ODU1 ODU2

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


APPLICATION SOFTWARE

Applic./present. SNMP
session layers

Transport
layer TCP/UDP

IPoverOSI
Routing IP
layer IS-IS
ISO 10589

Data link LLC LAPD LCC


PPP PPP MAC Q921 MAC
layer

Physical Ethernet Ethernet


RS232 EOC LAN EOC LAN
layer

Fig.45 - IP/IPoverOSI protocol stack

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


61
62
LIM RIM

Trib. IN 330 MHz


MUX BI MOD to ODU
Trib. rem.
loop
BB loop
330
DEMUX BE
Trib. OUT 140
IDU loop

Fig.46 - IDU loopback


Trib. loc. loop DEM

140 MHz
from ODU

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


9 DESCRIPTION OF THE MODULAR IDU WITH LIM
ETHERNET (2 MBIT/S TRIBUTARIES + ETHERNET
TRAFFIC)

Description that follows covers indoor unit with Ethernet ports, 1+0/1+1 Modular version. Paragraph 9.1.1
LIM Ethernet: 2 Mbit/s tributaries deals with 2 Mbit/s signals and paragraph 9.1.3 LIM Ethernet: Ethernet
traffic deals with Ethernet traffic treatment.

LIM Ethernet contains all the circuits of LIM with 2 Mbit/s interfaces plus some specific circuits for Ethernet
interface.

9.1 1+0/1+1 MODULAR IDU

Description that follows is referring to LIM/CONTROLLER/RIM modules contained into IDU.

9.1.1 LIM Ethernet: 2 Mbit/s tributaries

The LIM Ethernet performs the following operations:


• multiplexing process of the input tributaries

• aggregation of the multiplexed signals along with services through a Bit Insertion circuit

• processing in digital form of the baseband part of the QAM modulator (the IF part of the QAM mod-
ulator takes place within the RIM

• duplication of the digital processed signal to supply two RIMs in 1+1 versions. In the full duplicated
version the changeover occurs at tributary level
• concatenation of 2 Mbit/s streams

• connection between a local LAN port and a remote LAN port.

Different baseband structures and digital processing of the signal to be forwarded to the QAM modulator/
demodulator is produced by a “chip set”. Controls to the chip set and status/alarm reporting from the chip
set are given/received by main controller within the CONTROLLER module.

9.1.2 Circuit description

Tx side

The 2/34 Mbit/s input signal is code converted from HDB3 to NRZ format before being multiplexed. The
multiplexing scheme depends on the number and the bit rate of the input tributaries.
In the following are described different multiplations:

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


63
• 2/34 Mbit/s single tributary multiplexing. The mux performs stuffing operation and generates a pro-
prietary frame to be sent to the Bit Insertion. Opposite operation occurs at the Rx side.

• 2x2 Mbit/s multiplexing. The mux performs stuffing operation on each single tributary and gener-
ates a proprietary frame embedding the two tributaries to be sent to the Bit Insertion. Opposite
operation occurs at the Rx side.

• 4x2 Mbit/s multiplexing. The mux aggregates the four 2 Mbit/s tributaries generating a 8448 kbit/
s frame as per Recc. G.742. The multiplexed signal is then sent to the Bit Insertion. Opposite oper-
ation occurs at the Rx side.

• 8x2 Mbit/s multiplexing. The eight 2 Mbit/s tributaries are grouped in two 4x2 Mbit/s groups each
of one generating a G742 frame structure at 8448 kbit/s to be sent to the next Bit Insertion. Oppo-
site operation occurs at the Rx side.

• 16x2 Mbit/s multiplexing. The sixteen 2 Mbit/s tributaries are grouped in four 4x2 Mbit/s groups
each of one generating a G.742 frame structure at 8448 kbit/s. A further multiplexing of the
achieved four 8448 kbit/s streams will generate a frame structure at 34368 kbit/s as per Recc.
G.751. This latter is to be sent to the Bit Insertion.The 2 Mbit/s wayside undergoes stuffing process
before being sent to the Bit Insertion. Opposite operation occurs at the Rx side.

• 32x2 Mbit/s multiplexing. This version consisted of two multiplexers of 16x2 Mbit/s signals. Each of
one will generate a 34368 kbit/s frame structure as per Recc. G.751.
The two signals are sent to the Bit Insertion within the LIM for aggregation and stuffing process.
The 2 Mbit/s wayside undergoes stuffing process before being sent to the B.I.
Opposite operation occurs at the Rx side.

In addition to the tributary mux, an additional service mux is provided for aggregation of various service
signals interfaced by Controller module.
The multiplexed tributary and service signals are then sent to the B.I. for aggregate frame generation oc-
curring at the following bit rate depending on various versions implemented:

Tab.11 - Aggregate frame

Version Aggregate frame

2 Mbit/s 2430 kbit/s

2x2 Mbit/s 4860 kbit/s

4 Mbit/s 4860 kbit/s

8 Mbit/s 9720 kbit/s

16 Mbit/s 19440 kbit/s

32 Mbit/s 38880 kbit/s

64 Mbit/s 77760 kbit/s

The aggregate frame contains:

• the main signal from the MUX(s)

• the framed service signal from the service MUX


• the EOC signals for supervision message propagation towards the remote equipment

• the frame alignment word

• the bits dedicated to the FEC.

The LIM also includes the processing in digital form of the modulating signal to be sent to the mixers of
the QAM modulator within the RIM.

The digital process includes:

• serial to parallel conversion

• differential encoding

• generation of the shaped modulating signals I and Q to be sent to each individual RIM.

64
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Rx side

From the two RIMs the LIM is receiving the I and Q analogue signals then digital converted for the following
processing:

• clock recovery

• frequency and phase carrier locking

• baseband equalisation and filtering


• bit polarity decision

• differential decoding

• parallel to serial conversion to recover the aggregate signal at the receive side.

The aggregate signal is then sent to a frame alignment circuit and CRC analysis and then to the error cor-
rector. The errors uncorrected by the FEC are properly counted to achieve:

• BER estimate measurement

• radio performances

HBER/LBER/Early Warning Alarm roots for monitoring purpose and Rx switching operation are taken di-
rectly from CRC circuit before FEC correction.

The Rx switching receives the two aggregate signals and performs signal selection under the control of a
logic circuit according with Tab.12.

The changeover is error free and the system has built in capabilities of minimising the passed errors during
the detection time, such as the early warning criteria. The hitless switching facility provides automatic syn-
chronisation of the two incoming streams up to a dynamic difference of ± 7 bits; additionally, the switching
unit is also capable of compensating static delays between the two incoming streams of up to ±7 bits. At
the output of the Rx switch the Bit Extraction separates the main signal from the services and then, after
a proper demultiplexing process as previously described, sends them to the output interface lines.

Tab.12 - Switching priority

Priority Levels Description

Priority 1 RIM PSU Alarm


Highest
| Priority 2 Manual forcing (from main controller)
|
| Priority 3 Cable Short Alarm
|
| Priority 3 Cable Open Alarm
|
Priority 3 IF Unit Alarm
|
| Priority 3 Demodulator Failure
|
| Priority 3 Base Band Unit Failure Alarm
|
| Priority 3 ODU Unit Failure
|
| Priority 3 ODU PSU Alarm
|
Priority 3 VCO Failure Alarm
|
| Priority 3 High BER >10 –3
(or 10–4 or 10–5, selectable by software)
|
| Priority 4 Low BER > 10–6 (or 10–7 or 10–8, selectable by software)
|
| Early Warning BER > 10–9 (or 10–10 or 10–11 or 10–12, select-
Priority 5
| able by software)
|
| RF Input Low (Rx threshold SW selectable from –40 to –99
Priority 6
| dBm)

Priority 7 CRC Pulse
Lowest
Priority 8 Revertive Rx (branch one preferential)

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


65
9.1.3 LIM Ethernet: Ethernet traffic

Two versions of LIM Ethernet are available. They only differs for interface number:

• LIM Ethernet 4x2 Mbit/s + 3x10/100BaseT

• LIM Ethernet 16x2 Mbit/s + 4x10/100BaseT

In the following Ethernet interface circuits are described.

For the description of all the other circuits relative to 2 Mbit/s interface and the structure of LIM please
refer to previous paragraph. LIM Ethernet is equipped with the following interfaces:

• electrical interface Ethernet 10/100 BaseT IEEE 802.3

• from 0 to 4x2 Mbit/s (E1) interface

• total capacity from 2 to 64 Mbit/s or 105 Mbit/s

Most important functions of LIM Ethernet are:

• concatenation of Ethernet traffic in 2 Mbit/s tributaries and relevant multiplation


• LAPS Link Access Procedure SDH (ITU X.86) for concatenated 2 Mbit/s

• switch between a local LAN port and the radio LAN port

• MAC switching
• MAC address learning

• MAC address aging

• Ethernet interface with autonegotiation 10/100, full duplex, half duplex

- Ethernet interface with Flow Control, Back Pressure, MDI/MDX crossover

• network segmentation into the switch

• virtual LAN as per IEEE 802.1q (anyone from 0 to 4095 VID for a maximum of 64 memory location)
(see Fig.52)

• layer 2 QoS, priority management as per IEEE 802.1p (see Fig.52)

• layer 3 ToS/DSCP (see Fig.54 and Fig.55)

• packet forwarding

A block diagram of LIM Ethernet module can be found into Fig.51.

Into LIM Ethernet there is a “switch” with 3 external ports and 1internal ports. External ports are electrical
Ethernet 10/100BaseT interfaces placed on the front panel. Internal port is connected to radio side stream.

Ethernet traffic coming from external ports goes to internal port radio side. The radio side port is connected
to one or two streams group of concatenated 2 Mbit/s. One stream for capacity up to 16x2 Mbit/s and two
streams for capacity of 12 – 16 2 Mbit/s streams, plus other 16x2 Mbit/s streams in case of maximum
capacity.

In Tx side Ethernet traffic is packet into a protocol called LAPS similar to HDLC. The resulting stream is
divided into the used number of 2 Mbit/s streams. The 2 Mbit/s streams are then multiplexed, like into
standard LIM, together with 2 Mbit/s arriving from front panel, the resulting stream goes to the modulator,
see Fig.51.

In Rx the stream arriving from the demodulator is divided into the 2 Mbit/s streams, like into standard LIM,
then the 2 Mbit/s not used into the front panel 2 Mbit/s are concatenated and sent to Ethernet circuits.
Resulting stream, after LAPS protocol control, is sent to switch internal port.

9.1.3.1 2 Mbit/s tributaries

LIM Ethernet module uses the 16x2 Mbit/s mode of AL radio link. Tributary channels at 2 Mbit/s (E1) are
connected to 8 coaxial connectors 1.0/2.3 into front panel. 2 Mbit/s streams are multiplexed as into stand-
ard LIM.

From 0 to 16 2 Mbit/s tributaries can be selected to be used via SCT/LCT program, all the other available
2 Mbit/s are sent to switch internal port.

66
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
For 100 Mbit/s version can be selected up to 2 tributaries, position number 3 and 4 in tributary connectors
are available for wayside connection (2 Mbit/s each).

9.1.3.2 Electrical Ethernet interface

The electrical Ethernet/Fast Ethernet interfaces are type IEEE 802.3 10/100BaseT with RJ45 connector. For
input or output signals at RJ45 please refer to chapter 19 MODULAR IDU USER CONNECTIONS. Cable can
be UTP (Unshielded Twisted Pair) or STP (Shielded Twisted Pair) Category 5.

Standard coding:

• Ethernet 10 Mbit/s: Manchester

• Fast Ethernet 100 Mbit/s: MLT–3 ternary

EMC/EMI protection:
• input and output pins are galvanically isolated through a transformer

• to reduce EMI every pin at RJ45 connector is terminated even if not used

• two signal lines are equipped with low capacity secondary protection to sustain residuals of possible
electrostatic discharges (ESD).
With LCT/SCT program it is possible to activate autonegotiation (speed/duplex/flow control) on 10/
100BaseT interface.

9.1.3.3 Front panel LEDs

On FEM front panel there are a total of 6 Leds. There are 2 Leds for any Ethernet interface:
• DUPLEX: colour green, On = full duplex, OFF = half duplex

• LINK/ACT: colour green, ON = link up without activity, OFF = link down, BLINKING = link with ac-
tivity on Rx and Tx.

9.1.3.4 Switch function

A radio link AL equipped with a LIM/Ethernet module can operate like a switch between two or more sep-
arated LANs with the following advantages:

• to connect two separated LANs at a distance even greater than the maximum limits of 2.5 km (for
Ethernet)

• to connect two LANs via radio within a complex digital network

• to keep separated the traffic into two LANs towards MAC filtering to get a total traffic greater than
traffic in a single LAN.

The switch realized into LIM/Ethernet module is transparent (IEEE 802.1d and 802.q) into the same Vlan
described by VLAN Configuration Table. It works at data link level, Layer 2 of OSI pile, and leave untouched
Layer 3 and it takes care to send traffic from a local LAN to another (Local or Remote). Routing is only on
the basic of Level 2 addresses, sublevel MAC.

The operation is the following:

• when a LAN interface receives a MAC frame, on the basis of destination address, it decides which
LAN to send it

• if destination address is on originating LAN the frame is discarded

• if destination address is a known address (towards address learning procedure) and is present into
local address table the frame is sent only on destination LAN (MAC switching)

• otherwise the frame is sent to all ports with the same VLAN ID (flooding).

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


67
The switch is very different from a Hub, which copies slavishly everything that receives from a line on all
the others. The switch, in fact, acquires a frame, analyses it, reconstruct it and routes it and compensates
also the different speeds of the interfaces, therefore an input can be at 100 Mbit/s and output at 10 Mbit/s.

The mechanism is the following:

• from the moment of its activation, the switch examines all the frames that arrive it from different
LANs, and on these basis it builds its routing tables progressively.
In fact, every received frame allows to know on what LAN the sending station is located (MAC ad-
dress learning).

• every frame that arrives to the switch is rebroadcasted:

- if the switch has the destination address into the routing table, sends the frame only into the
corresponding LAN

- otherwise the frame is sent to all the LANs except the originating (flooding)

- as soon as the swicth increases its knowledge of different machines, the retransmission becomes
more and more selective (and therefore more efficient)

• the routing tables are updated every some minutes (programmable), removing addresses not alive
in the last period (so, if a machine is moved, within a few minute it is addressed correctly) (MAC
address aging).
The whole process is restricted to the ports which are members of the same Vlan as described into Vlan
Configuration Table.

9.1.3.5 Ethernet Full Duplex function

The first realizations of the Ethernet network were on coaxial cable with the 10Base5 standard.

According to this standard Ethernet interfaces (e.g. PC) are connected to the coaxial cable in parallel and
are normally in receiving mode. Only one PC, at a certain time, transmits on the cable, the others are re-
ceiving, so this is half duplex mode, and only one PC uses the received message.

Then the coaxial cable was progressively replaced by the pairs cable Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) as per
10BaseT standard. Normally there are four pairs into UTP Cat5 cable but two pairs are used with 10BaseT,
one for Tx one for Rx. Into 10Base5 and 10BaseT standards, network protocols are the same the difference
lays into the electrical interface. UTP cable is connected point to point between a hub and a Ethernet in-
terface. Network structure is a star where the server is connected to a hub and from this a UTP cable is
laid down for each Ethernet interface starts.

The further step is to replace the hub with a more powerful equipment, e.g. a switch. In this case it is
possible to activate transmission on both pairs at the same time, on one twisted pair for one direction, on
the other pair for opposite direction. Thus we obtain full duplex transmission on UTP.

Activating full duplex transmission it is possible to obtain a theoretical increase of performance of nearly
100%. Full duplex mode can be activated into 10/100BaseT interfaces manually or with autonegotiation
100BaseFx operates always into full duplex mode.

9.1.3.6 Link Loss Forwarding

Link Loss Forwarding (LLF) is an alarm status of ethernet interface.

LLF can be enabled or disabled. If LLF is enabled an US radio alarm condition will generate the alarm status
of Ethernet interface blocking any transmission to it. LLF can be enabled for each ports at front panel. With
LLF enabled the equipment connected (routers, switches so on) can be notified that radio link is not avail-
able and can temporarily reroute the traffic.

9.1.3.7 MDI/MDIX cross–over

The Ethernet electrical interface into FEM module can be defined by SCT program as MDI or MDIX to cross–
over between pairs so that external cross–over cable is not required.

68
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
9.1.3.8 VLAN functionality

LIM Ethernet module works with IEEE 802.1q and 802.1p tag for VLANs and QoS see Fig.52.

The virtual LAN (VLAN) are logical separated subnets so that all the stations, into VLAN, seem to be into
the same physical LAN segment even if they are geographically separated.

The VLAN are used to separate traffic on the same physical LAN too. Station operating on the same physical
LAN but on different VLAN work in separated mode thus they do not share broadcast and multicast mes-
sages. This results in a reduction of broadcast generated traffic and above all we get more security thanks
to network separation.

Tag position and structure are shown into Fig.52.

Tag is made up with:

• a fixed word of 2 bytes

• 3 bits for priority according 802.1p

• 1 fixed bit

• 12 bits VLAN identifier (VLAN ID) according 802.1q.

Switch crossconnections are based on Vlan Configuration Table where input and output ports or only output
ports should be defined for any used VID.

Vlan Configuration Table has 64 position for Vlan ID range from 1 to 4095.

9.1.3.9 Switch organized by port

The switch can be organized on port basis treating both Tagged and Untagged packets in the same way.

For each input port it is possible to define where to route the incoming traffic; one or more of the other
ports can be Enabled to exit the incoming traffic. These types of connection are monodirectional. For a
dibirectional connection between a generic Lan A and Lan B it is necessary to set the connection from Lan
A to Lan B and from Lan B to Lan A.

LIM Ethernet has external ports and one internal port, radio side. The internal switch can connect two or
more ports together.

Then MAC address bridging rules will be applied to this packet. It is possible to select that a packet follows
the description of Vlan Configuration Table for its Vlan ID.
Another selection is to follow only Vlan Configuration Table.

Packets can exit from a port as Unmodified or all Tagged either all Untagged. Unteggad packets will take
default tags.
For output operations there are 3 selections:

• unmodified: tagged packets keep their tag. Untagged packets remain untagged

• tagged: all the packets will exit tagged, tagged packets keep their tag, untagged packets take De-
fault VID of incoming port.

• untagged: all the packets will exit untagged.

9.1.3.10 Switch organized by VLAN ID

Vlan Configuration Table

Vlan Configuration Table defines a list of Vlan ID, For any Vlan ID some ports are members of Vlan others
are not members. Ports members of a Vlan are allowed to receive and send packets with that Vlan. Switch
dinamically assigns packets to the output port according their VLAN ID.

Packets aren’t sent out to that port unless they belong to one of the Vlan of which the port is a member.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


69
The ports, from which the packet can be sent, are defined in the VLAN Table. The VLAN of incoming packet
is filtered only if the parameter “Ingress Filtering Check” is set as “Secure”.

After having filtered the ports from which packet can go out according to VALN Table, the control of packet
and port Vlan membership MAC address bridging rules will be applied to this packet.

Ingress Filtering Check

This is a process to check an incoming packet to compare its Valn ID to input port’s Vlan membership. With
Ingress Filtering Check it is possible to permit only to tagged packets to enter the switch. If the port is not
member of the Vlan n. XX all the incoming packets with Vlan ID XX will be dropped.

There are 3 option into Ingress Filtering Check to manage incoming packets:

• Disable: all Tagged and Untagged packets can transit into the switch following setting of switch or-
ganized by port.

• Fallback: Incoming packets without TAG 802.1q follow the rules of switch organized by port, Tagged
frames with Vlan ID described into the Vlan Configuration Table follow the rules of the table, Tagged
frames with Vlan ID not described into the Vlan Configuration Table follow the rules of switch or-
ganized by port.

• Secure: Incoming packets without TAG 802.1q cannot enter the switch, Tagged frames with Vlan
ID described into the Vlan Configuration Table follow the rules of the table, Tagged frames with Vlan
ID not described into the Vlan Configuration Table cannot enter the switch.

Operations at the input. At the input port the packet is received and a switching decision must be made.
The switch analyses the Vlan ID (if present) and decides whether and where to forward the frame. If the
received packet is untagged, the switch sends the packet to the port specified into incoming port “Lan per
port” settings. If the packet is tagged the switch check the other destination ports to find at least one with
the same Vlan ID and put the packet into output port queue. If the Vlan ID is not listed into Vlan Config-
uration Table the switch sends the packet to the port specified into incoming port “Lan per port” settings.
Then MAC address bridging rules will be applied to this packet.

Operations at the output. For each output port there are the following selections for outgoing packets.

• Disable output port

• Enable unchanged: tagged packets keep their tag. Untagged packets remain untagged.
• Enable tagged: all the packets will exit tagged with Vlan ID specified into Vlan Configuration Table,
tagged packets keep their tag, untagged packets take Default VID of incoming port.

• Untagged: all the packets will exit untagged.

9.1.3.11 Layer 2, Priority function, QoS, 802.1p

Some services as voice overIP and videoconference have some time limits to work properly. A solution is
to increase the priority of time sensitive packets. In this case random crowding coming from other services
affects the delay of prioritized packets a lot less.
Into LIM Ethernet module different priority of incoming packets is managed using Tag defined into IEEE
802.1p (see Fig.52).
Every switch output port holds 4 output queues: queue 4 has highest priority, queue 0 has the lowest pri-
ority (see Fig.53).

Priority can be organized by incoming port or by incoming priority tag:

• Priority by incoming port. For Untagged packets at each input ports it is decided to send the packets
to one of the 4 queues of output ports defining which is the Default Priority Queue: Queue = 0, 1,
2, 3. For Tagged packets it is necessary to Disable Priority so they will go in the same queue of
Untagged packets.

• Priority by incoming priority. For tagged packets for each priority tag (3 bits = for 7 priority levels)
it is possible to define where to send the packets, into Queue from 0 to 3. Priority must be enable
on 802.1p mode only or IpToS mode only (see next paragraph) or first check 802.1p mode and
IpToS mode either first check IpToS mode only (see next paragraph) or first check 802.1p mode
and IpToS mode either first check IpToS mode and then 808.1q. For untagged packets the priority
is defined only by incoming port..

70
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
• Outgoing packet policy at output ports can be WFQ (Wait Fair Queue) with fixed proportional output
policy (8 packets from Queue 3, 4 from Queue 2, 4 from Queue 1, 1 from Queue 0) or “Strict Pri-
ority” that means that a queue completely empties before processing the next one.

9.1.3.12 Layer 3, Priority function, QoS, IP–V4 ToS (DSCP)

Only for IP packets it is possible to use incoming Layer 3 ToS (see Fig.54) to prioritize incoming packets.
The 8 bits available can be read as 7 bits of ToS or 6 bits of DSCP as shown in Fig.55.

According priority defined into ToS/DSCP the packet is sent into high priority queue low priority queue of
output ports.

With SCT/LCT program it is possible to select a different output queue for any ToS/DSCP priority level at
each input port.

9.1.4 RIM

Refer to Fig.47.

The RIM consists of the following main circuits:

• IF part of the QAM modulator

• IF part of the QAM demodulator

• power supply

• telemetry IDU/ODU.

9.1.4.1 QAM modulator

I and Q signals from LIM are connected to a 4 or 16QAM programmable modulator. It consists of the fol-
lowing circuits:

• recovery low pass filter to eliminate signal periodicity

• two mixers for carrier amplitude and phase modulation process


• 330 MHz local oscillator

• a 90° phase shifter to supply two mixers with two in quadrature carriers

• a combiner circuit to generate the QAM modulation

The thus obtained 330 MHz QAM modulated carrier is then sent to the cable interface for connection with
ODU.

9.1.4.2 QAM demodulator

At the receive side, from the cable interface, the 140 MHz QAM modulated carrier is sent to the QAM de-
modulator passing through a cable equalizer circuit. The QAM demodulator within the RIM extracts the I
and Q signals to be sent to the digital part of the demodulator within the LIM.

9.1.4.3 Power supply

The –48 V battery voltage feeds the IDU and ODU circuitry. The service voltages for the IDU feeding are
achieved through a DC/DC converter for +3.6 V generation and a step down circuit for –5V.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


71
Both voltages are protected against overvoltages and overcurrents.

The power to the ODU is given by the same battery running through the interconnection cable. An elec-
tronic breaker protects the battery against cable failure.

9.1.4.4 Telemetry IDU/ODU

The dialogue IDU/ODU is made–up by the main controller and associated peripherals within the ODU. Con-
trols for ODU management and alarm reporting is performed making use of a bidirectional 388 kbit/s
framed signals. The transport along the interconnecting cable is carried out via two FSK modulated carri-
ers: 17.5 MHz from IDU to ODU; 5.5 MHz from ODU to IDU.

9.1.5 CONTROLLER

The controller module performs the following:

• interfaces the service signals

• houses the equipment software for equipment management

• interfaces the SCT/LCT program through supervision ports

• receive external alarms and route them to relay contacts along with the internal alarms generated
by the equipment.

9.1.5.1 Service signals

The controller offers an electrical interface to the following three service channel options:

• 9600 baud/V28 with digital party line or in alternative 2x4800 baud/V28 – 9600 baud V28/RS232
synchronous/asynchronous channels
• 64 kbit/s/V11 codirectional or contradirectional

• 2 Mbit/s wayside G.703.

The service channels thus interfaced are then sent to the LIM for MUX/DEMUX processing.

For 100 Mbit/s version the following service channels are available:

• 9600 baud/V28 with digital party line or in alternative 2x4800 baud/V28 – 9600 baud V28/RS232
synchronous/asynchronous channels
• 2x2 Mbit/s wayside G.703 channels.

9.1.6 Equipment software

Equipment software permits to control and manage all the equipment functionality. It is distributed on two
hardware levels: main controller and ODU peripheral controllers.

The dialogue between main and peripheral controllers is shown in Fig.48.

72
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Main controller

The activities executed by the main controller are the following:

• Communication management: it makes use of SNMP as management protocol and IP or IP over OSI
as communication protocol stacks. See Fig.49 for details. The interface ports for the equipment
management are the following:

- LAN Ethernet 10BaseT/10Base2 or AUI

- USB port for 1+0 version

- RS232 asynchronous used for SCT/LCT connection

- RS232 asynchronous used for connection to further NEs


- EOC embedded within the PDH radio frame for connection to the remote NEs

- EOC embedded within the 2 Mbit/s tributary G.704 frame.

• Log–in: the main controller manages the equipment or network login/logout by setting and then
controlling the user’s ID and relevant password.

• Database (MIB): validation and storing in a non–volatile memory of the equipment configuration
parameters.

• Equipment configuration: distribution of the parameters stored in the MIB towards the peripheral
µPs for their actuation in addition to the controls from user not stored in the MIB (i.e. loops, manual
forcing etc...).

• Alarm monitoring: acquisition, filtering and correlation of the alarms gathered from slaved µPs. Lo-
cal logger and alarm sending to the connected managers: SCT/LCT – NMS5UX. Management of the
alarm signalling on the LIM front panel.

• Performances: PM management as per Recc. G.828.

• Download: the main controller is equipped with two flash memory banks containing the running pro-
gram (active bank) and the stand–by program (inactive bank). This permits to download a new soft-
ware release to the inactive bank without distributing the traffic.
Bank switch enables the new release to be used.
Download activity is based on FTP protocol which downloads application programs, FPGA configu-
ration, configuration files on main controller inactive bank or directly on the peripheral controllers.

Peripheral controllers

The peripheral controllers take place within the ODU and are slaved to main controller with the task of ac-
tivating controls and alarm reporting of dedicated functionality.

9.1.6.1 Supervision ports

The equipment management is made by SCT/LCT program through the supervision ports.

The following are made available:

• LCT/RS232 interface ports using PPP protocol and baud rate speed up to 57600

• LAN interface using IP or IPoverOSI protocols

• EOC (Embedded Overhead Channel) using a 64 kbit/s slot of the radio frame to broadcast the su-
pervision messages towards the remote terminals. The protocol used is IP or IPoverOSI.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


73
9.2 IDU LOOPS

To control the IDU correct operation a set of local and remote loops are made available. The commands
are forwarded by the LCT/SCT program. Loop block diagram is shown by Fig.50.

9.2.1 Tributary loop

Tributary local loop

Each input tributary is routed directly to the trib. output upon receiving the command from the LCT. The
Tx line transmission is still on.

Tributary remote loop

Each tributary directed towards the Rx output line is routed back to the Tx line. The Rx line is still on.

9.2.2 Baseband unit loop

This kind of loop is only local and is activated at BI/BE level. The Tx line is still on.

9.2.3 IDU loop

This kind of loop permits to check the full IDU operation. When activated, the modulator output is connect-
ed to demodulator input. The loop is assured by converting the frequency of the modulator from 330 MHz
to 140 MHz.

74
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
I&Q QAM 330 MHz
from LIM MOD
(IF part)

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


5.5 MHz
to LIM

17.5 MHz Cable


from LIM interface

Remote power supply

Overcurrent
protect.

DC

Fig.47 - RIM block diagram


battery I/V
protect +3.6 V
-48 V
DC

Step
down -5 V

I&Q

DEM Cable
to LIM QAM equaliz.
(IF part)

75
ODU2
Peripheral
controller
EOC

388 kbit/s
388 kbit/s

modem
generator

modem

338 kb/s
User Out

gen/rec.
Alarm/

receiver

FSK
FSK
User In

Main controller
LCT
RS232

388 kbit/s

ODU1
388 kbit/s
generator

388 kb/s
modem

modem

gen/rec.
receiver

FSK

FSK
LAN

Peripheral
controller

Fig.48 - Main and peripheral controller connection

APPLICATION SOFTWARE

Applic./present.
SNMP
session layers

Transport
layer TCP/UDP

Routing IPoverOSI
layer IP
IS-IS
ISO 10589

Data link LLC LAPD LCC


layer PPP PPP MAC Q921 MAC

Physical Ethernet Ethernet


RS232 EOC LAN EOC LAN
layer

Fig.49 - IP/IPoverOSI protocol stack

76
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
LIM RIM

Trib. IN 330 MHz


MUX BI MOD
Trib. rem. to ODU
loop
BB loop
330
DEMUX BE
Trib. OUT 140
IDU loop

Fig.50 - IDU loopback


Trib. loc. loop DEM

140 MHz
from ODU

77
10/100BaseT 2 Mbit/s

PDH RADIO

radio
PDH
Only for 32x2 Mbit/s version

Mbit/s

Mbit/s
16x2

16x2
MUX

MUX

CONCATENATED 2 Mbit/s
LAPS

0-4x2 Mbit/s
10/100BaseT

10/100BaseT
10/100BaseT

Fig.51 - LIM Ethernet 2 Mbit/s block diagram

78
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Ethernet Layer 2 Header, non-802.1p

Destination Source Type/Length

Ethernet Layer 2 Header, 802.1p

Destination Source Tag Control Info Type/Length

Ethernet Layer 2 Header, 802.1p


3 bit priority
Tagged frame type interpretation field 802.1p Canonical 12-bit 802.1q VLAN Identifier

8100 h
2-Bytes 3-Bits 1-Bit 12-Bits

Type = 2 byte (8100)


Level 2 priority (802.1p) = 3 bit (value from 0 to 7)
Level 2 VLAN (802.1q) = 12 bit (value from 1 to 4095)
Canonical form = 1 bit (shows if MAC addresses of current frame are with canonical form:
- C = 0 canonical form (MAC with LSB at left) (always into Ethernet 802.3 frames)
- C = 1 canonocal form (MAC with MSB ay left) (token ring and some FDDI)

Fig.52 - Tag control into field

Queue 3

Queue 2
Input port

Output Port
Queue 1

Queue 0

Fig.53 - Output queues

4 4 8 16
Version IHL TOS Total Length

Total Length Flags Fragment Offset


TTL Protocol ID Header Checksum

Source IP Address

Destination IP Address

Options Padding

Data

Fig.54 - ToS/DSCP tag position into IP packets

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


79
MSB LSB
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Not used
DSCP
Not used
ToS

Fig.55 - ToS/DSCP

80
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
10 DESCRIPTION OF THE IDU COMPACT UNIT FOR
2 MBIT/S TRIBUTARIES

10.1 IDU COMPACT 1+0/1+1 VERSION

The IDU Compact unit is made by a single motherboard which contains all the circuit that realize the fol-
lowing functionalities:

• line interface

• radio interface

• equipment controller

• IDU loop.

Inside it, we can distinguish the circuits LIM, RIM, CONTROLLER, as described in the chapter regarding the
Modular IDU.

The IDU Compact is realized in 1+0 version, containing only one RIM, and 1+1 version, containing two
RIMs. The maximum capacity of the IDU Compact is 16x2 Mbit/s.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


81
11 DESCRIPTION OF THE IDU COMPACT UNIT FOR
2 MBIT/S TRIBUTARIES AND FOR ETHERNET
TRAFFIC

11.1 VERSION IDU COMPACT ETHERNET 1+0/1+1

The compact IDU can be provided with only one optional Ethernet module. In this way, the equipment has
both 2 Mbit/s port and Ethernet ports and the bit rate assigned to the Ethernet traffic is the rated capacity
of the radio decreased by the enabled tributaries.

The module with the Ethernet interface is in alternative to the optional module with the service channels
V11, V28 + RS232.

The IDU Compact Ethernet is equipped with the following tributary interfaces:

• 3 Ethernet 10/100BaseT IEEE 802.3 electrical interfaces


• 16 2 Mbit/s (E1) interfaces.

The total capacity is from 4 to 64 Mbit/s.

For the description of the signal processing at 2 Mbit/s, refer to the chapter 8 DESCRIPTION OF THE MOD-
ULAR IDU FOR 2 OR 34 Mbit/s TRIBUTARIES.

For the description of the Ethernet signal processing, refer to chapter 9 DESCRIPTION OF THE MODULAR
IDU WITH lim ETHERNET (2 Mbit/s TRIBUTARIES + ETHERNET TRAFFIC).

82
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
12 DESCRIPTION OF THE MODULAR IDU PLUS FOR
2 MBIT/S TRIBUTARIES HIERARCHIC AND NOT
HIERARCHIC

12.1 GENERAL

The indoor unit IDU Plus is housed into a 1 Rack Unit (1RU) or 2 Rack Unit (2RU) and can have the following
configurations:

• terminal

• drop-insert
• nodal.

Radio side stream has a PDH structure NxE1 but user interface can be NxE1 or SDH STM-1 partially filled.

Modulation and capacity are programmable. Other characteristics are:

• hierarchic transport up to 32E1

• not hierarchic transport up to 53E1

• tributaries: E1 (2 Mbit/s), STM1, Ethernet


• managing up to 4 directions with drop-insert and cross-connection capability of 2 Mbit/s streams

• combined IDU plus can create a nodal system to interface up to 12 radios (ODU)

• path protection for E1 streams with drop-insert configuration

• dynamic modulation with automatic switch from 16QAM to 4QAM and viceversa, based on BER and/
or on the RX signal power

• internal PRBS generator and receiver on a E1 streams


• local Tx switch managed by Rx alarms on remote equipment

• modulation 4QAM, 16QAM, 32QAM

12.2 COMPOSITION OF TERMINAL 1RU

For 1RU composition see Fig.56:

1 LIM 32E1 or LIM STM1+16E1

2 equipment controller
3 RIM

4 cover or second RIM in 1+1 configuration

1 3

2 4

Fig.56 - IDU + 1RU composition

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


83
12.3 COMPOSITION OF TERMINAL 2RU

For 2RU composition see Fig.57:

1 equipment controller

2 LIM 32E1 o LIM STM1+16E1


3 expansion 53E1

4 cover

5 RIM

6 cover or second RIM in 1+1 configuration

7 cover or third RIM in 4x(1+0) configuration

8 cover or fourth RIM in 4x(1+0) configuration

1 5

2 6

3 7

4 8

Fig.57 - IDU + 2RU composition

12.4 1RU TERMINAL

With 1 Rack Unit it is possible to configure a 1+0 or 1+1 terminal and to manage up to 32E1 tributaries
with LIM32E1 or up to 53x2Mbit/s streams with LIM STM1+16E1 (16 are physical 2 Mbit/s other 37 are
built in STM1 stream). Capacity and configuration are listed in Tab.13.

Tab.13 - IDU Plus possible terminal configurations

Capacity Modulation Spectrum use Size

2x2 Mbit/s 4QAM


4x2 Mbit/s 16QAM 3,5 MHz 1RU
5x2 Mbit/s 16QAM

4x2 Mbit/s 4QAM


5x2 Mbit/s 4QAM
7 MHz 1RU
8x2 Mbit/s 16QAM
10x2 Mbit/s 16QAM

8x2 Mbit/s 4QAM


10x2 Mbit/s 4QAM
14 MHz 1RU
16x2 Mbit/s 16QAM
20x2 Mbit/s 16QAM

16x2 Mbit/s 4QAM


20x2 Mbit/s 4QAM 28 MHz 1RU
32x2 Mbit/s 16QAM

42x2 Mbit/s 16QAM


28 MHz 2RU
53x2 Mbit/s 32QAM

84
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
12.5 2RU TERMINAL

With 2 unit IDU Plus it is possible to manage up to 53 tributaries E1 with the following configurations:

• terminal 1+0

• terminal 1+1
• terminal 2x (1+0)

12.6 2 Mbit/s TRIBUTARY INTERFACE

The 2 Mbit/s tributary interface is 75 Ohm or 120 Ohm. Both interfaces are present into the front panel
connectors the user can select the interface to use, preparing in the correct way the relevant cabling.

12.7 MATRIX STM1+16E1 (1RU and 2RU)

Matrix module provides 16x2 Mbit/s interfaces and one SDH STM1 port. STM1 port is protected by two
STM1 interfaces that can be available electrical or optical (different 2 plug-in modules).

STM1 is terminated and the contained E1 streams are sent to switch matrix, where E1 streams can be re-
directed towards radio link, towards 2 Mbit/s interface or remapped into STM-1, or by means of NBUS to-
wards other IDUs equipped with Matrix. Modular IDU Plus is operating in MST mode and has a complete
SETS synchronisation circuit with input and output synchronisation signals.

Maximum capacity of LIM STM1+16E1 is:

• 53E1 for terminal 1+0

• 53E1 for terminal 1+1

• 79E1 for terminal 2x(1+0).

12.8 DROP-INSERT (2RU)

For 2RU subrack composition see Fig.57:

1 equipment controller

2 processor 53E1

3 matrix 32E1

4 processor 53E1

5 RIM
6 cover or second RIM in 1+1 configuration

7 cover or third RIM in 4x(1+0) configuration

8 cover or fourth RIM in 4x(1+0) configuration.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


85
With drop-insert configuration (only into 2RU, see Fig.58) it is possible to manage up to 4 directions radio
(full capacity) with the possibility to drop-insert freely the 2 Mbit/s streams arriving from the 4 directions
and from front panel according the capacity of the switch matrix (32E1).

For example with 32E1 the maximum drop-insert possibilities is 32 tributaries but total capacity is limited
by total capacity of 4 directions. If total capacity of 4 directions is less then 32E1 that is the drop-insert
limit.

Maximum capacity arriving from the 4 radios is with 4 link at 53E1 for a total of 212 E1. For any configu-
ration the switch matrix is no blocking. A repeater can be done without activating local E1 ports.

ODU1A ODU2A ODU1B ODU2B

RIM1A RIM2A RIM1B RIM2B

Processor A Processor B

LIM A LIM B

53E1 53E1 53E1 53E1

Back Plane

or

Matrix with Matrix with


32E1 front panel STM1 front panel

21E1

32E1 Exp 16E1 NBUS


53E1
NBUS

STM1 STM1
21E1
Two redundant
STM1 interfaces

Fig.58 - IDU Plus 2RU drop/insert and nodal structure

86
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
12.9 NODAL (UP TO 3X2RU)

Composition of nodal is similar to drop-insert (see Fig.57):

1 equipment controller

2 processor 53E1
3 1+0 matrix node STM1+16E1, 1+1 matrix STM-1 +16E1, 2x(1+0) matrix STM1 + 16E1

4 processor 53E1

5 RIM

6 cover or RIM

7 cover or RIM

8 cover or RIM

A node can be made up of up to 3 subracks of 2RU so that we can have up to 12 maximum independent
radio directions.

On the front panel of the STM1+16E1 matrix there are two “NBUS” ports (1 and 2) which must be con-
nected to other one or two 2RU subracks as in Fig.59 and Fig.60.

The connection among the subracks are made by cables of CAT7 quality, SIAE code F03471 length 75 cm,
to insert into the NBUS connectors (1 and 2) on the front panel.

Each subrack must be defined as NodeA, NodeB or NodeC. The cables among the NBUS must be connected
only as in Fig.59 and Fig.60.

NBUS can operate in Protected modality or in Not Protected modality. Each NBUS carries 126 E1’s. In case
of Not Protected modality, all the 126 E1’s of the NBUS are used to connect a subrack to the other for a
total amount of 252 E1 connections available on the NBUS.

In case of Protected modality, the unused connections, for example between node A (NBUS1) and node B
(NBUS1) are used as protection of the connections between node A (NBUS1) and node B (NBUS1); for
example 63 E1’s are used between node A and node B and the other 63 E1’s are used as protection of the
connections between node A and node C, the connections used as protection pass from node B in pass-
through modality without need of programming.

Warning: for the best operation of the protected modality, it is necessary to choose the shortest path as
preferential connection; for example, for the connections between A and B choose the connections between
A and B as preferential; for the connection between A and C choose the connections between A and C as
preferential.

In case of protected modality, the system displays, by means of the SCT/LCT program in the cross-con-
nection window, only the NBUS with 126 E1’s (subdivided in two parts for a better graphic display). The
unused E1 ports are automatically programmed as pass-through between NBUS1 and NBUS2 but these
connections are not displayed in SCT/LCT.

In case of unprotected modality, the system displays, by means of the SCT/LCT program in the cross-con-
nection window, the NBUS1 and NBUS2 buses each one with 126 E1’ (subdivided in two parts for a better
graphic display).

The troubles in the connections between the NBUS buses are signalled by alarms.

In case of protected modality, if the cable carrying the traffic is broken, an alarm is issued on the relevant
NBUS port, the equipment software switches the traffic on the other operating NBUS cable.

12.9.1 Expansion from 2 to 3 nodes

Suppose that the nodes A and B already exist and that you must add the node C. Disconnect the cable
between NBUS2 node A and NBUS2 node B, the traffic is automatically switched to the other cable, if nec-
essary.

By SCT/LCT, re-program the nodes A and B as nodes with 3 items.

By SCT/LCT, re-program the node C as nodeC, protected and define the node with 3 items.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


87
Connect the NBUS2 of the node A with NBUS1 of node C, connect the NBUS2 of the node B with NBUS2 of
the node C as in Fig.59.

Program the interested cross-connections between node A and node C and between node B and node C;
the unused connections are automatically assigned to the pass-through between node A and node B.

The same procedure can be used even if the added node is different from C.

12.9.2 Reduction from 3 to 2 nodes

Suppose that the nodes A, B and C already exist and that the node C must be removed.

Delete all the cross-connections between the node C and the node A and between the node C and the node
B.

Remove the cables of the NBUS which go to node C.

Connect the node A NBUS2 to the node B NBUS2 as in Fig.60.

The same procedure can be used even if the deleted node is different from C.

In NMS5UX/LX the three nodes A, B, C are managed as a single equipment.

2RU
Node A
NBUS1 NBUS2

NBUS1 NBUS2 NBUS2 NBUS1

2RU 2RU
Node B Node C

Fig.59 - Nodal connections in 3 subracks

2RU

NBUS1 NBUS2

NBUS1 NBUS2

2RU

Fig.60 - Nodal connections in 2 subracks

88
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
53E1 53E1 53E1 53E1

16E1
NODAL

53E1
STM1 NBUS

NBUS
STM1 (1+0) or (1+0 MSP) or 2x(1+0)

53E1
NODAL

53E1
STM1

53E1
16E1

NBUS

16E1
NODAL

53E1 53E1 53E1 53E1

Fig.61 - Nodal - 12 max radio directions, max 6xstm-1, max 48E1 all disconnecting, no blocking

For each subrack of the node, a maximum of 4 radio streams of 53E1 arrive, for a total of 212E1. Each
subrack can cross-connect, in no-locking mode, 212E1 (via radio) + 2x126E1 (via NBUS) + 16E1 (via SCSI
connector on the front side) + 2x63E1 (via STM-1) for a total of 606E1.

A node of 3 subracks with 2RU can cross-connect, in no-locking mode, up to 3x212E1 (via radio) + 3x16E1
(via SCSI connector on the front side) + 6x63E1 (via STM1) for a total of 1062E1 (see Fig.61).

The Nodal equipment with SDH STM1 interface is a Regenerator Section Termination (RST) and a Multiplex
Section Termination (MST) therefore it generates the STM-1 frame and has an internal synchronization cir-
cuit SETS. The synchronization of the Node is distributed on the NBUS.

The SETS circuit can be seen as a single circuit which provides to the synchronization of the three subracks.

The SETS circuit can be disabled if only PDH interfaces are present in the node

For each Nodal subrack, the STM-1 interface can be duplicated (1+1 MSP) for the possible protection of
the connection via cable.

The switching criteria in Rx are:

• Unequipped

• LOS
• LOF

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


89
• MSAIS

• TIM

• B2 excessive BER

• B2 degraded BER.

12.10 DYNAMIC MODULATION

During the period of bad propagation, the system changes modulation to increase the system gain keeping
constant the transmitted band, decreasing the transmitted capacity and increasing the availability of the
system for the privileged traffic.

With the dynamic modulation, about the half of the traffic is saved, without the dynamic modulation all the
traffic would be lost at the reaching of the BER threshold of 10-3.

The modulation switches from 32QAM to 4QAM or to 16QAM to 4QAM as in Tab.14.

Tab.14 - Capacity change

Modulation 16/32QAM from Modulation 4QAM to

4x2 @ 16QAM no dynamic modulation

5x2 @ 16QAM no dynamic modulation

8x2 @ 16QAM 4x2 @ 4QAM

10x2 @ 16QAM 5x2 @ 4QAM

16x2 @ 16QAM 8x2 @ 4QAM

21x2 @ 16QAM 10x2 @ 4QAM

32x2 @ 16QAM 16x2 @ 4QAM

42x2 @ 16QAM 21x2 @ 4QAM

53x2 @ 32QAM 21x2 @ 4QAM

The reduction of the traffic capacity is communicated to NMS by means of the Reduced Capacity Alarm.

12.10.1 Capacity reduction

Conditions for the request of modulation change from 32/16QAM to 4QAM by the receiver with lower qual-
ity (B):

1 the PTx power of the transmitter A towards B has reached the maximum value with ATPC active and
Max PTx value set to the maximum value
2 the PRx power at the receiver B is lower than the ATPC Low Thresholds and then more power is
required to the transmitter

3 BER at the receiver B is lowest than 10-9.

For the restore of the modulation from 4QAM to 16/32QAM, the following conditions are necessary on both
sides:

1 the PTx power at 4QAM is equal to the maximum power possible for the modulation 16/32QAM

2 the ATPC circuit is not requiring the increase of the Tx power of the remote transmitter

3 no error is occurred in the last seconds (default: 10 seconds).

90
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Note: If maximum PTx at 4QAM is 20dBm and the maximum PTx at 16QAM is 15dBm then the difference
is 5dB the PTx Boost value can be from 0 to 5dB. If the ATPC values are not correct, the dynamic modu-
lation is not activated.

The Performance Monitoring are reported as 16QAM. The AIS on the tributaries is not available.

The Upgrade of equipment already installed can be executed by means of the simple download from the
supervision network.

12.10.2 Setting with SCT/LCT

A green light signal shows that the dynamic modulation is active, the orange light signal signals that the
reduction of modulation is active: in this case the Reduced Capacity Alarm is active.

Warning: no configuration change must be made when the Dynamic Modulation is active. In detail, if a loop
must be executed, first deactivate the Dynamic Modulation.

PTx Boost: increase of PTx power with reduced modulation, default 5Db Receiving Hysteresis: number of
dB from the Prx level with BER 10-9, default 2dB.

Atpc Hysteresis for recovering: hysteresis of Atpc from the restore of 16QAM, default 0dB.

Recovering timeout: seconds with PRx level stable before the restore of the 16QAM modulation, default
10sec.

Tx power Overboost: increase of the Tx power of 3dB with 16QAM modulation. Enable only if allowed by
the laws of Your country.

12.11 LIM

The LIM performs the following operations:

• multiplexing process of the input tributaries


• aggregation of the multiplexed signals along with services through a Bit Insertion circuit

• processing in digital form of the baseband part of the QAM modulator (the IF part of the QAM mod-
ulator takes place within the RIM)
• duplication of the digital processed signal to supply two RIMs in 1+1 versions. In the full duplicated
version the changeover occurs at tributary level.

Different baseband structures and digital processing of the signal to be forwarded to the QAM modulator/
demodulator is produced by a “chip set”. Controls to the chip set and status/alarm reporting from the chip
set are given/received by main controller within the CONTROLLER module.

12.12 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

Tx side

Refer to Fig.62.
The 2 Mbit/s input signal is code converted from HDB3 to NRZ format before being multiplexed. The mul-
tiplexing scheme depends on the number and the bit rate of the input tributaries.

In addition to the tributary mux, an additional service mux is provided for aggregation of various service
signals interfaced by Equipment Controller module.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


91
The multiplexed tributary and service signals are then sent to the B.I. for aggregate frame generation oc-
curring at the bit rate depending on various versions implemented.

The aggregate frame contains:

• the main signal from the MUX(s)

• the framed service signal from the service MUX

• the EOC signals for supervision message propagation towards the remote equipment

• the frame alignment word

• the bits dedicated to the FEC.

All the synch. signals to perform multiplexing (demultiplexing) and BI (BE) process are achieved from a x0
at 48 MHz

The LIM also includes the processing in digital form (see Fig.62) of the modulating signal to be sent to the
mixers of the QAM modulator within the RIM.

The digital process includes:

• serial to parallel conversion


• differential encoding

• generation of the shaped modulating signals I and Q to be sent to each individual RIM.

Rx side

Refer to Fig.63.

From the two RIMs the LIM is receiving the I and Q analogue signals then digital converted for the following
processing:

• clock recovery

• frequency and phase carrier locking

• baseband equalisation and filtering

• bit polarity decision

• differential decoding

• parallel to serial conversion to recover the aggregate signal at the receive side.

The aggregate signal is then sent to a frame alignment circuit and CRC analysis and then to the error cor-
rector. The errors uncorrected by the FEC are properly counted to achieve:

• BER estimate measurement

• radio performances

HBER/LBER/Early Warning Alarm roots for monitoring purpose and Rx switching operation are taken di-
rectly from CRC circuit before FEC correction.

The Rx switching receives the two aggregate signals and performs signal selection under the control of a
logic circuit according with Tab.15.

The changeover is hitless and the system has built in capabilities of minimising the passed errors during
the detection time, such as the early warning criteria. The hitless switching facility provides automatic syn-
chronisation of the two incoming streams up to a dynamic difference of ± 7 bits; additionally, the switching
unit is also capable of compensating static delays between the two incoming streams of up to ±7 bits. At
the output of the Rx switch the Bit Extraction separates the main signal from the services and then, after
a proper demultiplexing process as previously described, sends them to the output interface lines.

92
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Tab.15 - Switching priority

Priority Levels Description

Priority 1 RIM PSU Alarm


Highest
| Priority 2 Manual forcing (from main controller)
|
| Priority 3 Cable Short Alarm
|
| Priority 3 Cable Open Alarm
|
Priority 3 IF Unit Alarm
|
| Priority 3 Demodulator Failure
|
| Priority 3 Base Band Unit Failure Alarm
|
| Priority 3 ODU Unit Failure
|
| Priority 3 ODU PSU Alarm
|
Priority 3 VCO Failure Alarm
|
| Priority 3 High BER >10–3 (or 10–4 or 10–5, selectable by software)
|
| Priority 4 Low BER > 10–6 (or 10–7 or 10–8, selectable by software)
|
| Early Warning BER > 10–9 (or 10–10 or 10–11 or 10–12, select-
Priority 5
| able by software)
|
| RF Input Low (Rx threshold SW selectable from –40 to –99
Priority 6
| dBm)

Priority 7 CRC Pulse
Lowest
Priority 8 Revertive Rx (branch one preferential)

12.13 RIM

Refer to Fig.64.

The RIM consists of the following main circuits:

• IF part of the QAM modulator

• IF part of the QAM demodulator

• power supply

• telemetry IDU/ODU

There are two types of RIM according to modulation capability:

• 4QAM/16QAM or

• 4QAM/16QAM/32QAM

Inside the RIM, behind the front panel, the is a fuse for protection to whole IDU. It is a soldering type fuse.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


93
12.13.1 QAM modulator

I and Q signals from LIM are connected to a 4/16/32QAM programmable modulator. It consists of the fol-
lowing circuits:

• recovery low pass filter to eliminate signal periodicity

• two mixers for carrier amplitude and phase modulation process

• 330 MHz local oscillator

• a 90° phase shifter to supply two mixers with two in quadrature carriers

• a combiner circuit to generate the QAM modulation

The thus obtained 330 MHz QAM modulated carrier is then sent to the cable interface for connection with
ODU.

12.13.2 QAM demodulator

At the receive side, from the cable interface, the 140 MHz QAM modulated carrier is sent to the QAM de-
modulator passing through a cable equalizer circuit. The QAM demodulator within the RIM extracts the I
and Q signals to be sent to the digital part of the demodulator within the LIM.

12.13.3 Power supply

The –48 V battery voltage feeds the IDU and ODU circuitry. The service voltages for the IDU feeding are
achieved through a DC/DC converter for +3.6 V generation and a step down circuit for –5V.

Both voltages are protected against overvoltages and overcurrents.

The power to the ODU is given by the same battery running through the interconnection cable.

An electronic breaker protects the module and the battery against cable failure. Protections are automat-
ically restored. Overcurrent or missing current on IDU-ODU cable are detected by Cable short and Cable
open alarm.

12.13.4 Telemetry IDU/ODU

The dialogue IDU/ODU is made–up by the main controller and associated peripherals within the ODU. Con-
trols for ODU management and alarm reporting is performed making use of a bidirectional 388 kbit/s
framed signals. The transport along the interconnecting cable is carried out via two FSK modulated carri-
ers: 17.5 MHz from IDU to ODU; 5.5 MHz from ODU to IDU.

12.14 EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER

The Equipment Controller module performs the following:

• interfaces the service signals

• houses the equipment software for equipment management

• interfaces the SCT/LCT program through supervision ports

94
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
• receive external alarms and route them to relay contacts along with the internal alarms generated
by the equipment.

Warning: lithium battery inside, refer to national rules for disposal.

12.14.1 Service signals

The Equipment Controller offers an electrical interface to the following three service channel options:

• 9600 baud/V28 with digital party line or in alternative 2x4800 baud/V28 – 9600 baud V28/RS232
synchronous/asynchronous channels

• 64 kbit/s/V11 codirectional or contradirectional

• 2 Mbit/s wayside G.703 (not available in no-hierarchical configurations).


The service channels thus interfaced are then sent to the LIM for MUX/DEMUX processing.

12.14.2 Equipment software

Equipment software permits to control and manage all the equipment functionality. It is distributed on two
hardware levels: main controller and ODU peripheral controllers.

The dialogue between main and peripheral controllers is shown in Fig.65.

Main controller

The activities executed by the main controller are the following:

• Communication management: it makes use of SNMP as management protocol and IP or IP over OSI
as communication protocol stacks. See Fig.66 for details. The interface ports for the equipment
management are the following:

- LAN Ethernet 10BaseT/10Base2 or AUI

- USB port for 1+0 version


- RS232 asynchronous used for SCT/LCT connection (if USB connector is not used) or with other
NE

- EOC embedded within the PDH radio frame for connection to the remote NEs

- EOC embedded within the 2 Mbit/s tributary G.704 frame.

• Log–in: the main controller manages the equipment or network login/logout by setting and then
controlling the user’s ID and relevant password.

• Database (MIB): validation and storing in a non–volatile memory of the equipment configuration
parameters.

• Equipment configuration: distribution of the parameters stored in the MIB towards the peripheral
µPs for their actuation in addition to the controls from user not stored in the MIB (i.e. loops, manual
forcing etc...).

• Alarm monitoring: acquisition, filtering and correlation of the alarms gathered from slaved µPs. Lo-
cal logger and alarm sending to the connected managers: SCT/LCT – NMS5UX. Management of the
alarm signalling on the LIM front panel.

• Performances: PM management as per Recc. G.828.

• Download: the main controller is equipped with two flash memory banks containing the running pro-
gram (active bank) and the stand–by program (inactive bank). This permits to download a new soft-
ware release to the inactive bank without distributing the traffic.
Bank switch enables the new release to be used.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


95
Download activity is based on FTP protocol which downloads application programs, FPGA configu-
ration, configuration files on main controller inactive bank or directly on the peripheral controllers.

Peripheral controllers

The peripheral controllers take place within the ODU and are slaved to main controller with the task of ac-
tivating controls and alarm reporting of dedicated functionality.

12.14.3 Supervision ports

The equipment management is made by SCT/LCT program through the supervision ports.

The following are made available:

• LCT (USB) and RS232 interface with PPP protocol

• LAN interface using IP or IPoverOSI protocols; two LAN interfaces are connected with a “all-pass”
switch
• EOC (Embedded Overhead Channel) using a 64 kbit/s slot of the radio frame to broadcast the su-
pervision messages towards the remote terminals. The protocol used is IP or IPoverOSI.

12.15 IDU LOOPS

To control the IDU correct operation a set of local and remote loops are made available. The commands
are forwarded by the LCT/SCT program. Loop block diagram is shown by Fig.67.

12.15.1 Tributary loop

Tributary local loop

Each input tributary is routed directly to the trib. output upon receiving the command from the LCT. The
Tx line transmission is still on.

Tributary remote loop

Each tributary directed towards the Rx output line is routed back to the Tx line. The Rx line is still on.

12.15.2 Baseband unit loop

This kind of loop is only local and is activated at BI/BE level. The Tx line is still on.

96
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
12.15.3 IDU loop

This kind of loop permits to check the full IDU operation. When activated, the modulator output is connect-
ed to demodulator input. The loop is assured by converting the frequency of the modulator from 330 MHz
to 140 MHz.

12.16 EXPANSION 53E1

This board can be used in a 2RU in position 3 together with LIM 32E1 to provide the interfaces necessary
to connect up to 53E1.

12.17 SERVICE CHANNEL ADAPTER

This board can be used in a 2RU in position 3 together with LIM 32E1.
This board gives the interface to service channels CH1 and CH2 plus 2 Mbit/s wayside channel. To be used
when there are no matrix and no expansion 53E1.

12.18 PROCESSOR 53E1

The 53E1 processor has the same functionnality of LIM but doesn’t have the front panel connector because
all 53E1 are sent to Matrix.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


97
98
NRZ
BI: Digital MOD D/A I&Q
2/34 Mbit/s Code - main traffic to RIM1
G.703 converter CK - S/P convertion
- services - diff. encoding
- EOC - modulating
- FEC signal I&Q
MUX - FAW D/A to RIM2
NRZ generation
2x2/4x2
Code 8x2/16x2
converter CK 32x2/5x2 Frame
X0 48 MHz
10x2/21x2 generator
nx2 42x2/53x2
. Mbit/s
.
. - FSK mod/demod
nx34 - 388 frame
NRZ generator/receiver
Code
converter CK

2 Mbit/s only (16x2 or


to/from main
wayside higher speed
controller

Fig.62 - LIM block diagram - Tx side


Service
services Controller channel
module module synchr.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


BER meas.
P.M.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


A FEC
- Ck recovery
D - Carrier lock CRC
- Equaliz. & filt. analysis
I&Q
- Decision & aligner
from
- Diff. decod.
RIM1
- S/P
2 Mbit/s
Code G.703
converter
DEMUX
2x2/4x2
- BER extimates 8x2/16x2
- High BER 32x2/5x2
- Low BER 10x2/21x2 Code
SW BE 42x2/53x2
- EW logic converter
Mbit/s
nx2
Mbit/s

Code
converter
from switch

Fig.63 - LIM block diagram - Rx side


main controls
P
µ

I&Q from same as


RIM2 above
Service Services
Controller
channel
module
DEMUX

99
100
I&Q QAM
330 MHz
from LIM MOD
(IF part)

5.5 MHz
to LIM

17.5 MHz Cable


from LIM interface

Remote power supply

Overcurrent
protect.

DC

Fig.64 - RIM block diagram


battery I/V
protect +3.6 V
-48 V
DC

Step
down -5 V

I&Q

DEM
Cable
to LIM QAM
equaliz.
(IF part)

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


Peripheral
controller
EOC

388 kbit/s

ODU2
338 kb/s
User Out

gen/rec.
388 kbit/s
generator

modem

modem
Alarm/

receiver

FSK

FSK
User In

Main controller
LCT
RS232

388 kbit/s

ODU1
388 kb/s
gen/rec.
388 kbit/s

modem
generator

modem
receiver

FSK
FSK
LAN
USB

Peripheral
controller

Fig.65 - Main and peripheral controller connection

APPLICATION SOFTWARE

Applic./present. SNMP
session layers

Transport
layer TCP/UDP

IPoverOSI
Routing IP
layer IS-IS
ISO 10589

Data link LLC LAPD LCC


PPP PPP MAC Q921 MAC
layer

Physical Ethernet Ethernet


RS232 EOC LAN EOC LAN
layer

Fig.66 - IP/IPoverOSI protocol stack

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


101
102
LIM RIM

Trib. IN 330 MHz


MUX BI MOD to ODU
Trib. rem.
loop
BB loop
330
DEMUX BE
Trib. OUT 140
IDU loop

Fig.67 - IDU loopback


Trib. loc. loop DEM

140 MHz
from ODU

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


13 DESCRIPTION OF THE IDU COMPACT PLUS FOR
2 MBIT/S TRIBUTARIES AND ETHERNET TRAFFIC

13.1 IDU COMPACT PLUS ETHERNET 1+0/1+1 VERSION

The IDU Compact Plus can be provided with optional Ethernet tributary interface. In this way, the equip-
ment has both 2 Mbit/s ports and the Ethernet ports, and the bit rate assigned to the Ethernet traffic is the
rated capacity of the radio decreased by the enabled tributaries.

The IDU Compact Plus is equipped with the following interfaces:

• 3 Ethernet 10/100BaseT IEEE 802.3 electrical interfaces

• 32 2Mbit/s (32xE1) interfaces.


For the description of the processing of the 2Mbit/s signals, refer to the description of the IDU Plus.

For the description of the processing of the Ethernet signals, refer to the description of the IDU Modular
Ethernet.
The IDU Compact Plus with Ethernet tributary is realized in terminal configuration.

The transmission capacity is displayed in Tab.16.

Tab.16 - Transmission capacity of the IDU Compact Plus with Ethernet

64 Mbit/s 2/4/5/8/10/16/21/32 E1 + 3x10/100BaseT 1+0/1+1

105 Mbit/s 2/4/5/8/10/16/21/32 E1 + 3x10/100BaseT 1+0/1+1

V11 RS232 Trib. 17-24 Trib. 25-32 DPX


1 2 3
ACT LINK
10/100 BaseT
TX RX PS
TEST 1 1
1 2 1 2
R AL 2 2
1 2
+

Q3/2 Q3/1 LCT USER IN/OUT Trib. 1-8 Trib. 9-16 M 3.15A 250VAC - 48VDC 48VDC - M 3.15A 250VAC

Fig.68 - Compact IDU PLUS 1+1 (32E1 + 3ETH)

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


103
14 DESCRIPTION OF THE MODULAR IDU FOR E/W
REPEATER WITH DROP/INSERT

14.1 GENERAL

Description that follows covers indoor unit for East/West repeater with Ring Protection.

Paragraph 14.2 COMPOSITION deals with unit composition because number and type of modules are dif-
ferent respect a standard IDU.

Paragraph 14.3 IDU CHARACTERISTICS deals with an explanation of unit block diagrams and with a de-
scription of functions performed by each module.

14.2 COMPOSITION

Indoor unit for East/West repeater with Drop/Insert functionalities is made up with the following modules:

- D12052–02 Processor unit (2: East, West)

- D12089 Crossconnection matrix

- D12094 Controller

- D12037 RIM (2: East, West)

D12052-02 D12089 D12037

RIM1
FAIL
East RIM2

RIM1
FAIL RIM2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

West FAIL

IDUODU TX RX
A WAY
Q3 SIDE
LCT RS232 REMTEST CH1 CH2 2Mb/s
USER IN/OUT

D12094

Fig.69 - IDU for E/W repeater

104
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
14.3 IDU CHARACTERISTICS

14.3.1 Management of tributaries

A 2 Mbit/s tributary can be managed by cross connection matrix in different ways:

• Ring Protection – A tributary is inserted (transmitted) in radio aggregate frame towards both direc-
tion and can be dropped (received) from one direction or from the other depending on cross con-
nection and E1 switch criteria

• Pass through – IDU works as repeater, tributary coming from one direction is sent to the other

• Loop – E1 accessing the matrix from East side or West side can be looped back towards its origin.

14.3.2 Capacity

IDU max capacity depends on modulation used:


• 16QAM – max capacity is 32x2 Mbit/s with maximum 16 tributaries with protected connections
(Drop/Insert). Lower capacity can be set.

• 4QAM – max capacity is 16x2 Mbit/s and in this configuration all tributaries can be set in DropInsert
or in Pass through (in this last configuration the three sides of the matrix have the same capacity:
16x2 Mbit/s). Lower capacity can be set.

System can work with one branch capacity different than the other.

14.3.3 E1 switching criteria

In network configuration where thus East/West repeater IDU is employed as a Ring Protection, where a
direction protects the other on the opposite direction, the E1 drop can be managed through suitable E1
switching criteria:
1 Manual forcing

2 2 Mbit/s G.704 alarms (AIS, OOF, OOMF, BER6) where:

- AIS: presence of AIS

- OOF: out of E1 frame

- OOMF: out of E1 multiframe

- BER6: BER = 10–6

3 Preferential.

14.4 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

Description that follows is referring to MATRIX/PROCESSOR/CONTROLLER/RIM module the IDU consists of.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


105
14.4.1 Matrix

Matrix module presents on front panel the 2 Mbit/s connectors and contains the sixteen relevant electrical
interface and the cross connection matrix.

The matrix allows connections of 2 Mbit/s streams with following capacities and directions:

• east side – 32x2 Mbit/s, subdivided from 1 to 16 one at a time and from 17 to 32 framed inside a
34368 kbit aggregate

• west side – 32x2 Mbit/s, subdivided from 1 to 16 one at a time and from 17 to 32 framed inside a
34368 kbit aggregate

• towards front panel – 16x2 Mbit/s 75 ohm.

Function performed by matrix module are the following:

• code conversion of 2 Mbit/s streams in input and output (for Drop/Insert operations)

• tributary transit between East and West

• tributary transit towards one or both directions, in position not involved in tributary transit

• tributary drop from East or West or from one of them using appropriate switching criteria.

Tributaries cross connected by matrix are sent and received to/from East and/or West processor module,
depending on their direction and connection.

Hitless Rx switch between 2 Mbit/s streams, coming from East and West, can work with relative delay up
to 7 ms.

14.4.2 Processor

Operations performed by processor module depend on selected capacity and modulation.

Tx side

• 32x2 Mbit/s (available in 16QAM only) – processor module receives from matrix 32 tributaries, the
first sixteen one by one and the second sixteen inside a 34368 kbit/s aggregate. The first sixteen
tributaries, in MUX block, are grouped in a frame structure at 34368 kbit/s as per Recc. G751. In
this way two aggregates at 34368 kbit/s are sent to the Bit Insertion. The 2 Mbit/s wayside under-
goes stuffing process before being sent to the B.I.
After B.I. signal at 77760 kbit/s is sent to modulator.
• 16x2 Mbit/s – Processor module receives from Matrix 16 tributaries. The sixteen tributaries are
grouped in a frame structure at 34368 kbit/s as per Recc. G751. In this way the aggregate at 34368
kbit/s is sent to the Bit Insertion. The 2 Mbit/s wayside undergoes stuffing process before being sent
to the B.I. After B.I. signal at 38880 kbit/s is sent to modulator.

• 8x2 Mbit/s – Processor module receives from matrix 8 tributaries. These are grouped in two 4x2
Mbit/s groups generating a G.742 frame structure at 8448 kbit/s and sent to the Bit Insertion. After
B.I. signal at 19440 kbit/s is sent to modulator.

• 4x2 Mbit/s – Processor module receives from matrix 4 tributaries. These are grouped in one 4x2
Mbit/s group generating a G.742 frame structure at 8448 kbit/s and sent to the Bit Insertion. After
B.I. signal at 9720 kbit/s is sent to modulator.

• 2x2 Mbit/s – Processor module receives from matrix 2 tributaries. These are grouped in a proprie-
tary frame and sent to the Bit Insertion. After B.I. signal at 4860 kbit/s is sent to modulator.

An additional Service Mux/Demux is provided to aggregate various service signal interfaces by Controller
module. Achieved stream is sent to BI/BE to obtain the aggregate frame (various bit rate depending on
capacity set) for block MOD/DEMOD.

This aggregate frame contains:

• main signal from MUX and from MATRIX

• aggregate signal from service MUX

106
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
• EOC signal for supervision towards remote equipment

• Frame Alignment Word

• Bits dedicated to FEC.

Processor also includes digital process of modulating signal to be sent to the mixer of QAM modulator inside
RIM. The digital process includes:

• serial to parallel conversion

• differential encoding

• generation of shaped modulating signal I and Q towards the RIM module.

Rx side

From connected RIM, Processor module receives I and Q analogue signals, converts them in digital form
and performs:

• clock recovery

• frequency and phase carrier locking


• baseband equalisation and filtering

• bit decision

• differential decoding

• parallel to serial conversion to recover aggregate signal.

Aggregate signal is sent to a frame alignment circuit and CRC analysis and after to error corrector block
(FEC). Errors are properly counted to achieve:

• BER estimate measurement

• Radio performances.

HBER alarm is used to insert AIS in Rx signal.


Achieved signal is sent to Bit Ex circuit that, depending on capacity and modulation, performs in opposite
way the operations mentioned in Tx side.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


107
108
to/from RIM EAST to/from RIM WEST

I Q I Q

D/A D/A

5.5 MHz 17.5 MHz 5.5 MHz 17.5 MHz

Digital MOD/DEMOD From


Digital MOD/DEMOD From
controller
- FSK mod controller
- S/P conversion - 388 kbit/s - S/P conversion - FSK mod
- Differ. Encode/Decode - Differ. Encode/Decode - 388 kbit/s
- Modulation/Demodulation - Modulation/Demodulation
with CRC and FEC with CRC and FEC

77760 kbit/s 77760 kbit/s


From
From service
service channel
Bit In/Bit Ex Bit In/Bit Ex
channel interface
interface - Main traffic + services - Main traffic + services
- EOC Aggregate CK - EOC Aggregate CK
- FEC - FEC
- FAW - FAW

34368 kbit/s 34368 kbit/s 34368 kbit/s 34368 kbit/s

MUX/DEMUX MUX/DEMUX
16x2 16x2
EAST WEST
MATRIX

Fig.70 - Block diagram of IDU with Cross Connection Matrix


(17...32) - E1 in Pass through
- E1 with protected connection

(1...16) 16x2 Mbit/s

...
Tributary interfaces
1 16

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


14.4.3 RIM

Refer to Fig.71.

The RIM consists of the following main circuits:

• IF part of the QAM modulator

• IF part of the QAM demodulator

• power supply

• telemetry IDU/ODU

14.4.3.1 QAM modulator

I and Q signals from LIM are connected to a 4 or 16QAM programmable modulator. It consists of the fol-
lowing circuits:

• recovery low pass filter to eliminate signal periodicity

• two mixers for carrier amplitude and phase modulation process

• 330 MHz local oscillator

• a 90° phase shifter to supply two mixers with two in quadrature carriers
• a combiner circuit to generate the QAM modulation

The thus obtained 330 MHz QAM modulated carrier is then sent to the cable interface for connection with
ODU.

14.4.3.2 QAM demodulator

At the receive side, from the cable interface, the 140 MHz QAM modulated carrier is sent to the QAM de-
modulator passing through a cable equalizer circuit. The QAM demodulator within the RIM extracts the I
and Q signals to be sent to the digital part of the demodulator within the LIM.

14.4.3.3 Power supply

The –48 V battery voltage feeds the IDU and ODU circuitry. The service voltages for the IDU feeding are
achieved through a DC/DC converter for +3.6 V generation and a step down circuit for –5V.

Both voltages are protected against overvoltages and overcurrents.

The power to the ODU is given by the same battery running through the interconnection cable. An elec-
tronic breaker protects the battery against cable failure.

14.4.3.4 Telemetry IDU/ODU

The dialogue IDU/ODU is made–up by the main controller and associated peripherals within the ODU. Con-
trols for ODU management and alarm reporting is performed making use of a bidirectional 388 kbit/s
framed signals. The transport along the interconnecting cable is carried out via two FSK modulated carri-
ers: 17.5 MHz from IDU to ODU; 5.5 MHz from ODU to IDU.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


109
14.4.4 CONTROLLER

The controller module performs the following:

• interfaces the service signals

• houses the equipment software for equipment management

• interfaces the SCT/LCT program through supervision ports

• receive external alarms and route them to relay contacts along with the internal alarms generated
by the equipment.

Warning: lithium battery inside, refer to national rules for disposal.

14.4.4.1 Service signals

The controller offers an electrical interface to the following three service channel options:

• 9600 baud/V28 with digital party line or in alternative 2x4800 baud/V28 – 9600 baud V28/RS232
synchronous/asynchronous channels

• 64 kbit/s/V11 codirectional or contradirectional

• 2 Mbit/s wayside G.703.

The service channels thus interfaced are then sent to the LIM for MUX/DEMUX processing.

14.4.4.2 Equipment software

Equipment software permits to control and manage all the equipment functionality. It is distributed on two
hardware levels: main controller and ODU peripheral controllers.

The dialogue between main and peripheral controllers is shown in Fig.72.

Main controller

The activities executed by the main controller are the following:


• Communication management: it makes use of SNMP as management protocol and IP or IP over OSI
as communication protocol stacks. See Fig.73 for details. The interface ports for the equipment
management are the following:

- LAN Ethernet 10BaseT/10Base2 or AUI

- USB asynchronous used for SCT/LCT connection

- RS232 asynchronous used for connection to further NEs or for SCT/LCT connection

- EOC embedded within the PDH radio frame for connection to the remote NEs

- EOC embedded within the 2 Mbit/s tributary G.704 frame.

• Log–in: the main controller manages the equipment or network login/logout by setting and then
controlling the user’s ID and relevant password.

• Database (MIB): validation and storing in a non–volatile memory of the equipment configuration
parameters.

• Equipment configuration: distribution of the parameters stored in the MIB towards the peripheral
µPs for their actuation in addition to the controls from user not stored in the MIB (i.e. loops, manual
forcing etc...).

• Alarm monitoring: acquisition, filtering and correlation of the alarms gathered from slaved µPs. Lo-
cal logger and alarm sending to the connected managers: SCT/LCT – NMS5UX. Management of the
alarm signalling on the LIM front panel.

• Performances: PM management as per Recc. G.828.

110
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
• Download: the main controller is equipped with two flash memory banks containing the running pro-
gram (active bank) and the stand–by program (inactive bank). This permits to download a new soft-
ware release to the inactive bank without distributing the traffic.
Bank switch enables the new release to be used.
Download activity is based on FTP protocol which downloads application programs, FPGA configu-
ration, configuration files on main controller inactive bank or directly on the peripheral controllers.

Peripheral controllers

The peripheral controllers take place within the ODU and are slaved to main controller with the task of ac-
tivating controls and alarm reporting of dedicated functionality.

14.4.4.3 Supervision ports

The equipment management is made by SCT/LCT program through the supervision ports.

The following are made available:

• LCT/RS232 interface ports using PPP protocol and baud rate speed up to 57600

• LAN interface using IP or IPoverOSI protocols

• EOC (Embedded Overhead Channel) using a 64 kbit/s slot of the radio frame to broadcast the su-
pervision messages towards the remote terminals. The protocol used is IP or IPoverOSI.

14.5 IDU LOOPS

To control the IDU correct operation a set of local and remote loops are made available. The commands
are forwarded by the LCT/SCT program. Loop block diagram is shown by Fig.74.

14.5.1 Tributary loop

Tributary local loop

Each input tributary is routed directly to the trib. output upon receiving the command from the LCT. The
Tx line transmission is still on.

Tributary remote loop

Each tributary directed towards the Rx output line is routed back to the Tx line. The Rx line is still on.

14.5.2 Baseband unit loop

This kind of loop is only local and is activated at BI/BE level. The Tx line is still on.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


111
14.5.3 IDU loop

This kind of loop permits to check the full IDU operation. When activated, the modulator output is connect-
ed to demodulator input. The loop is assured by converting the frequency of the modulator from 330 MHz
to 140 MHz.

East side or West side tributary loop

Tributaries, accessing the matrix from East side or West side, not assigned nor in a Transit nor in a cross
connection, can be looped back towards their direction of origin.

interface
Cable

+3.6 V

-5 V
protect

down
Step
I/V
Remote power supply
17.5 MHz
330 MHz

5.5 MHz

DC

equaliz.
Cable
DC
Overcurrent
protect.
(IF part)

from LIM
MOD
QAM

to LIM

(IF part)
QAM
DEM
I&Q
I&Q

battery
from LIM

to LIM
-48 V

Fig.71 - RIM block diagram

112
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
LAN RS232 LCT User In Alarm/
User Out

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


Main controller EOC

388 kbit/s 388 kbit/s


generator generator
receiver receiver

FSK FSK
modem modem

FSK FSK

Fig.72 - Main and peripheral controller connection


modem modem

388 kbit/s 388 kbit/s

Peripheral 388 kb/s 338 kb/s Peripheral


controller gen/rec. gen/rec. controller

ODU1 ODU2

113
APPLICATION SOFTWARE

Applic./present.
SNMP
session layers

Transport
layer TCP/UDP

Routing IPoverOSI
layer IP
IS-IS
ISO 10589

Data link LLC LAPD LCC


layer PPP PPP MAC Q921 MAC

Physical Ethernet Ethernet


RS232 EOC LAN EOC LAN
layer

Fig.73 - IP/IPoverOSI protocol stack

114
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
EAST ODU

IDU
loop
RIM

MOD/
DEM

Baseband
PROCESSOR

loop

BI/BE West side


East side trib. loops

32
East side
.
.
. MATRIX
.
.
1

Remote loop Remote loop


..........
Local loop Local loop
1 Tributary 16

Fig.74 - IDU E/W loops

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


115
15 CHARACTERISTICS OF THE OUTDOOR UNIT

15.1 GENERAL

The ODU unit is available in two different versions: AL and AS.


AS ODU is also called Universal ODU because it can work with ALS equipment (SDH).
The following ODU characteristics are guaranteed for the temperature range from –33° C to +55° C.

15.2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

- Output power at the antenna side see Tab.17

- Tuning range

- AL4 45.5 MHz

- AL7 42 MHz (154 MHz go-return)


56 MHz (161/168/196 MHz go-return)
94 MHz (245 MHz go-return)

- AL8 42 MHz (119 and 126 MHz go-return)


112 MHz (310 MHz go-return)
120 MHz (311,32 MHz go-return)
91 MHz (266 MHz go-return)
94.5 MHz (274 MHz go-return)

- AL13 84 MHz

- AL15 84 MHz (315/322 MHz go-return


119 MHz (420/490/728 MHz go-return)

- AL18 330 MHz

- AL23 336 MHz


- AL25/AL28 448 MHz

- AL32 252/280 MHz

- AL38 560 MHz

- RF frequency agility 125 kHz step

- Duplex spacing

- AL4 100 MHz

- AL7 154/161/168/196/245 MHz

- AL8 311,32 MHz

- AL11 490/530 MHz

- AL13 266 MHz

- AL15 315/322/420/490/728 MHz

- AL18 1010 MHz

- AL23 1008/1232 MHz

- AL25 1008 MHz

- AL28 1008 MHz

116
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
- AL32 812 MHz

- AL38 1260 MHz

- ATPC dynamic range 40 dB

- Transmit power attenuation range 40 dB, 1 dB step software adjustable

- Transmitter shut–down 40 dB

- Antenna side flange

- AL4 N female connector


- AL7/8 UBR84 (with separated antenna)

- AL11 UBR100

- AL13 UDR120 or PDR120 with 90° rigid elbow

- AL15 UDR140 or PDR140 with 90° rigid elbow

- AL18/23/25 UBR220 or PBR220 with 90° rigid elbow

- AL28/32/38 UBR320 or PBR320 with 90° rigid elbow

- AGC dynamic range from –20 dBm to threshold corresponding


to BER10–3

- Accuracy of Rx level indication (PC reading) ±3 dB from –50 dBm to threshold


±4 dB from –49 dBm to –20 dBm

- Maximum input level for BER 10–3 –20 dBm

- Type of connector at the cable interface side “N”

- Signals at the cable interface

- QAM modulated carrier 330 MHz (from IDU to ODU)


140 MHz (from ODU to IDU)

- Telemetry 388 kbit/s


- Telemetry carriers 17.5 MHz (from IDU to ODU)
5.5 MHz (from ODU to IDU)

- Available loops RF loop

Tab.17 - Nominal output power (1+0 version) AL ODU/AS ODU (±1 dB tolerance)

Output power Output power Output power


GHz
4QAM 16QAM 32QAM
a
4 +29 dBm +24 dBm +22 dBm
7 +27/29 dBm +22/26 dBm +20/26 dBm
8 +27/29 dBm +22/26 dBm +20/26 dBm
11 +25/28 dBm +20/25 dBm +20/25 dBm
13 +25/28 dBm +20/25 dBm +20/25 dBm
15 +25/28 dBm +20/25 dBm +20/25 dBm
18 +20/23 dBm +15/21 dBm +15/21 dBm
23 +20/23 dBm +15/21 dBm +15/21 dBm
25 +20/23 dBm +15/20 dBm +15/20 dBm
28 +19/22 dBm +14/19 dBm +14/19 dBm
a.
32 +17 dBm +13 dBm +13 dBm
38 +17/20 dBm +13/17 dBm +13/17 dBm

a. Only ODU AL

Note

In 1+1 hot stand–by version the output power decreases by the following values:
• –4 dB ±0.5 dB (balanced hybrid)
• –1.7/7 dB ±0.3 dB (unbalanced hybrid)

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


117
16 OUTDOOR UNIT DESCRIPTION

16.1 GENERAL

The 1+0 ODU (refer to Fig.75 or to Fig.77) consists of a two shell aluminium mechanical structure, one
shell housing all the ODU circuits, the other forming the covering plate.

On the ODU are accessible:

• the “N” type connector for cable interfacing IDU and ODU

• the “BNC” connector for connection to a multimeter with the purpose to measure the received field
strength

• a ground bolt.

The 1+1 hot stand–by version (refer to Fig.76) consist of two 1+0 ODUs mechanically secured to a struc-
ture housing the hybrid for the antenna connection.

ODU exists in two different versions, AL and AS. They differs about dimensions and output power.

AS ODU is also called Universal because it can work with ALS equipment (SDH).

16.2 TRANSMIT SECTION

Refer to block diagram shown in Fig.78.

The 330 MHz QAM modulated carrier from the cable interface (see chapter 16.4 CABLE INTERFACE) is for-
warded to a mixer passing through a cable equalizer for cable loss compensation up to 40 dB at 330 MHz.
The mixer and the following bandpass filter give rise to a second IF Tx carrier the frequency of which de-
pends on the go/return frequency value. The mixer is of SHP type.

The IF Tx frequency is µP controlled. Same happens to Rx IF and RF local oscillators. This latter is common
to both Tx and Rx sides.

The IF carrier is converted to RF and then amplified making use of a MMIC circuit. The conversion mixer is
SSB type with side band selection.

The power at the MMIC output can be manually attenuated by 40 dB, 1 dB step.

Total attenuation is 40 dB including the 20 dB attenuator that follows.

The automatic adjustment is performed making use of an ATPC (see paragraph 16.5 ATPC OPERATION for
details). The regulated output power is kept constant against amplifier stage gain variation by a feedback
including the AGC.

Before reaching the antenna side the RF signal at the output of MMIC passes through the following circuits:

• a decoupler plus detector diode to measure the output power

• a circulator to protect the amplifier stages against possible circuit mismatch.

• a ON/OFF switch for 1+1 operation

• an RF bandpass filter for antenna coupling.

An RF coupler plus a detector and a shift oscillator made up the RF loop which is enabled upon receiving a
µP control. The RF loop permits the Tx power to return back to receive side thus controlling the total local
radio terminal performance.

118
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
16.3 RECEIVE SECTION

The RF signal from the Rx bandpass filter is sent to a low noise amplifier that improves the receiver sen-
sitivity. The following down–converter translates the RF frequency to approximately 765 MHz. The conver-
sion mixer is SSB type. The sideband selection is given through a µP control.

A second down converter generates the 140 MHz IF carrier to be sent to the demodulator within the IDU.
The level of the IF carrier is kept constant to –5 dBm thank to the IF amplifier stages, AGC controlled,
distributed in the IF chain. In addition the AGC gives a measure of the receive RF level.
Between two amplifiers a bandpass filter assures the required selectivity to the receiver. The filter is SAW
type and the bandwidth depends on the transmitted capacity.

16.4 CABLE INTERFACE

The cable interface permits to interface the cable interconnecting IDU to ODU and viceversa.

It receives/transmits the following signals:

• 330 MHz (from IDU to ODU)

• 140 MHz (from ODU to IDU)


• 17.5 MHz (from IDU to ODU)

• 5.5 MHz (from ODU to IDU)

• remote power supply.


The 17.5 MHz and 5.5 MHz FSK modulated carriers, carry the telemetry channel. This latter consists of two
388 kbit/s streams one from IDU to ODU with the information to manage the ODU (RF power, RF frequen-
cy, capacity, etc...) while the other, from ODU to IDU, sends back to IDU measurements and alarms of the
ODU. The ODU management is made by a µP.

16.5 ATPC OPERATION

The ATPC regulates the RF output power of the local transmitter depending on the value of the RF level at
the remote terminal. This value has to be preset from the local terminal as threshold high and low. The
difference between the two thresholds must be equal or higher than 3 dB.

As soon as the received level crosses the preset threshold level low (see Fig.81) due to the increase of the
hop attenuation, a microP at the received side of the remote terminal sends back to the local terminal a
control to increase the transmitted power. The maximum ATPC range is 40 dB.

If the hop attenuation decreases and the threshold high is crossed then the control sent by the microP
causes the output power to decrease.

16.6 1+1 Tx SYSTEM

The two ODUs are coupled to the antenna side via a balanced or unbalanced hybrid.

1+1 Tx switching occurs in the 1+1 hot stand–by 1 antenna or 2 antennas versions as shown in Fig.79 and
Fig.80.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


119
The transmitter switchover is electromechanical type and consists of two ON/OFF switches within the two
ODUs that assure at least 40 dB insulation on the stand–by transmitter.

Transmit alarm priority is shown in Tab.18.

Tab.18 - Transmit alarm priority

Priority Levels Definition

Priority 1 RIM PSU Alarm

Priority 2 Manual forcing

Priority 3 Cable Short Alarm

Priority 3 Cable Open Alarm

Priority 3 Modulator Failure

Priority 3 ODU Unit Failure Alarm


Highest
Priority 3 VCO Failure Alarm

Priority 3 IF Unit Alarm

Priority 3 ODU PSU Alarm

Priority 3 Tx Power Low Alarm

Request from remote terminal (both re-


Priority 4
ceivers alarmed)

Lowest Priority 5 Revertive Tx (branch one preferential)

16.7 POWER SUPPLY

The battery voltage is dropped from the cable interface and then sent to a DC/DC converter to generate
three stabilized output voltages to be distributed to the ODU circuitry:

• +3.5 V

• a voltage comprised between +6.2 V and +8.2 V to power MMIC amplifiers operating at different
frequency bands

• a –12 V through an inverter circuit.

Each voltage is protected against overcurrent with automatic restart.

Protection against overvoltage occurs as soon as the output voltage raises more than 15% respect to the
nominal voltage. The restart is automatic.

120
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
"N"

"BNC"

Ground bolt

Fig.75 - 1+0 AL ODU

Fig.76 - 1+1 AL ODU

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


121
Fig.77 - 1+0 AS or Universal ODU version

122
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
DC +3.5 V
DC

Step +6.2 to 8.2 V


up
PTx att.
control

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


-12 V 0 to 40 dB
-48 V INV

AGC

x
N type 330
Cable MHz Cable IF Tx
interface equaliz. T

MMIC

MOD Alarm Alm


388 manag comm
5.5 kbit/s MUX Tx Tx
5.5 loops
MHz MHz DEMUX &
ctrl ctrl RF LO RF
control LO
IF ctrl
unit unit loop
BNC REC DEM
17.5 17.5 388
17.5 MHz kbit/s Rx Rx antenna
MHz
MHz side
PRx
meas.

approx.

Fig.78 - ODU block diagram (both versions)


ctrl 765
MHz

140 LNA
MHz
x
variable bw 140
(capacity MHz
depending)

PRx meas AGC

123
Tx side

SW control

Rx side

Antenna
side
Tx side

SW control

Rx side

Fig.79 - 1+1 hot stand–by 1 antenna

Tx side

SW control
First
antenna
Rx side

Tx side

SW control
Second
antenna
Rx side

Fig.80 - 1+1 hot stand–by 2 antennas

124
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Remote PRx
dBm

Local Remote

Tx Rx
Thresh High
PTx actuation PRx recording
Thresh Low level
µP µP
PTx control
Transmission
Rx Tx
of PTx control

Hop attenuation (dB)

Local PTx
dBm

PTx max.

40 dB
ATPC range

PTx min.

Hop attenuation (dB)

Fig.81 - ATPC operation

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


125
17 24/48 VOLT DC/DC CONVERTER D52089

17.1 GENERAL

The 24/48V DC/DC converter D52089 is a unit which converts the voltage of 24 Vdc in –48 Vdc.

This unit is housed in a subrack 1 RU unit G52004 with two D52089 units (1+1 version). For 1+0 version
the subrack is G52003 with one D52089 unit and the remaining half front panel has a cover.

These subracks have a free air gap for cooling purpose.

The DC/DC converter unit D52089 is shown in Fig.82.

Fuse 6.3 A 24 Vdc input male 3W3 connector

– –
+

M6,3A ON
+ 48Vdc
ALARM
24Vdc
250V IN OUT
2A

48 Vdc output female 3W3 connector


Green LED CM2 connector

Fig.82 - DC/DC converter front coverplate

17.2 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

- Operational range -10° ÷ 50° C

- Storage range -40° ÷ 80° C

- Operational humidity 90% max in the range -5° ÷ 30° C

17.3 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS

- Vinput 24 Vdc (20.4 ÷ 28.8 Vdc floating)

- Voutput 52 Vdc
- Max current in input 4.5 A

- Max 24 Vdc consumption 90 W

- Max 48 Vdc load 75 W

- Secondary voltage ripple ≤ 200 mVpp

- Surge current (Inrush current) ETS 300 132-2

- Conducted immunity ETS 300 132-2

126
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
- Conducted emission ETS 300 132-2

- Short duration voltage transient ETS 300 132-2 (ETR 283)

- Abnormal service voltage ETS 300 132-2

- Voltage changes due to the regulation


of power supply ETS 300 132-2

- Electromagnetic compatibility EN 300 086

- Safety EN 60950-1

- Protections against - input polarity inversion (fuse)


- surge input current (fuse)
- continuous short circuit at output with automatic
recovery

- Visual indication ON = green led active on input primary voltage


present

- Alarm (CM2 connector) with relay contact on 9 pin male SUB–D connector
Alarm off: 8–9 pin open, 7–9 pin closed
Alarm on when Vout decreases ≥ 15%: 8–9 pin
closed, 7–9 pin open

- Fuse 6.3 A medium time 250 Volt

Fig.83 shows, as example, connection from IDU 1+0 AL compact version to 24/48 V converter with cable
F03489.

Fig.84 shows, as example, connections from IDU 1+1 AL compact version to 24/48 V converter with cables
F03489 and F03278.

Warning: connect only 24 Vdc to primary input 24 Vdc IN.

Warning: power supply from –48 Vdc must be connected directly to ALC IDU.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


127
128
G52003 Fuse 6.3 A 24 Vdc IN

+
+
– –
ALARM
6,3A ON 2A
M IN OUT
250V 24Vdc 48Vdc

F03489

Trib. 1–2–3–4

Q3 LCT USER IN/OUT 48V


PS
TEST
R AL
Trib. 5–6–7–8

Warning: connect only 24 Vdc to primary input 24 Vdc IN

Fig.83 - 24/48 V DC/DC converter connections to IDU 1+0

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Fuse 6.3 A Fuse 6.3 A 24 Vdc IN
24 Vdc IN

+
+
+
+
– – – –
ALARM ALARM
6,3A ON 24Vdc 48Vdc 6,3A ON 24Vdc 48Vdc
M IN 2A M IN OUT
250V OUT 250V 2A

F03278 F03489

Trib. 1–2–3–4 Trib. 9–10–11–12

Q3 LCT USER IN/OUT 48V1 48V2


TX RX PS1

TEST 1
1 2 1 2
R AL 2
Trib. 5–6–7–8 Trib. 13–14–15–16 PS2
– –
+
+

Warning: connect only 24 Vdc to primary input 24 Vdc IN

Fig.84 - 24/48 V DC/DC converter connections to IDU 1+1

129
130
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Section 3.
INSTALLATION

18 INSTALLATION AND PROCEDURES FOR ENSUR-


ING THE ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY

18.1 GENERAL INFORMATION TO BE READ BEFORE THE INSTALLA-


TION

ALS equipment is a split mount (indoor-outdoor) PDH/SDH radio link system operating in the frequency
ranges 4, 6, 7, 8, 13, 15, 18, 23, 25, 28 and 38 GHz, for low, medium and high transport capacity (from
4 up to 622 Mbit/s), designed to establish LAN-LAN connections and PDH/SDH access. For the details re-
lated to the actual used frequency band refer to the label on the equipment.

The system is provided with an integral antenna; however, in case its antenna is not used, it should be
connected to an antenna conforming to the requirements of ETSI EN 302 217-4-2 for the relevant frequen-
cy band.

The equipment is composed by the following separate units:

• radio unit (outdoor) with or without integral antenna

• Baseband (indoor)

This equipment makes use of non-harmonized frequency bands.

Class 2 radio equipment subject to Authorisation of use. The equipment can operate only at the fre-
quencies authorised by the relevant National Authority.

The deployment and use of this equipment shall be made in agreement with the national regulation
for the Protection from Exposure to Electromagnetic Field.

The symbol indicates that, within the European Union, the product is subject to separate collec-
tion at the product end-of-life. Do not dispose of these products as unsorted municipal waste. For more
information, please contact the relevant supplier for verifying the procedure of correct disposal.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


131
18.2 GENERAL

The equipment consists of IDU and ODU(s) units and is mechanically made up of a wired 19” subrack (IDU)
and a weather proof metallic container (ODU). The two units are shipped together in an appropriate card-
board box.

After unpacking, mechanical installation takes place followed by electrical connections as described in the
following paragraphs.

18.3 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION

18.3.1 IDU installation

On their sides the subracks making up the several IDU versions are provided with two holes for the M6
screws fastening the subracks to a rack or to a 19” mechanical structure. The front of the IDU mechanical
structure is provided with the holes at the sides. This permits to fasten the subrack to a 19” rack by means
of 4 M6 screws.

18.3.2 1RU IDU installation

To avoid overtemperature problems the free space below and above a 1RU IDU must be 44 mm (1RU)
minimum.

18.3.3 2RU IDU installation

To avoid overtemperature problems the free space below and above a 2RU IDU must be 44 mm (1RU)
minimum.

Nodal and Drop/Insert compositions need the use of D12148-03 controller. In case of different com-
positions it is necessary to have 88 mm (2RU) free space below and above the 2RU IDU.

18.4 ELECTRICAL WIRING

The electrical wiring must be done using appropriate cables thus assuring the equipment responds to the
electromagnetic compatibility standards.

The cable terminates to flying connectors which have to be connected to the corresponding connectors on
the equipment front.

Position and pin–out of the equipment connectors are available in this section.
Tab.19 shows the characteristics of the cables to be used and the flying connector types.

132
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Tab.19 - Characteristics of the cables

Type of connector terminating


Interconnecting points Type of cable/conductor
the cable

Polarized SUB–D 3W3 female con- Section of each wire ≥ 2.5


Battery
nector sq.mm a

– 75 ohm coaxial cable with


double shield diameter 4.5
mm dielectric in expanded
polyethylene type 2YCC
0.4/2.5 or equivalent
Tributary signals 1.0/2.3 male connector – Alternatively to the above
option, 75 ohm coaxial ca-
ble with double shield, di-
ameter 3.1 mm dielectric in
Teflon type RG179 B/U DS
or equivalent

–120 Ohm balanced four


symmetric pairs with shield
–75 Ohm unbalanced four
coaxial cable pairs with the
Tributary signals 25 pin SUB–D male connector
shield connect to ground
pin (see “19 MODULAR IDU
USER CONNECTIONS” doc-
ument for pin details)

8 conductor cable different


SCSI 50 pin male connector
Tributary signals for 75 Ohm and 120 Ohm
(IDU Plus)
signals

9 conductor cable with


Female type D connector with 9 double brass sheath type
User input/alarm output
pins and shielded holder interconductor DB28.25 or
equivalent

9 conductor cable with


Female type D connector with 9 double brass sheath type
LCT/RS232
pins and shielded holder interconductor DB 28.10 or
equivalent

GND Faston male type Section area ≥ 6 sq. mm.

a. For power cable length longer than 20 m. a section of 4 mm is required.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


133
18.5 CONNECTIONS TO THE SUPPLY MAINS

During the final installation, the IDU must be protected by a magneto-thermal switch (not supplied with
the equipment), whose characteristics must comply with the laws in force in one's country.

The disconnection from the supply mains is made disconnecting the connector SUB-D 3W3 from the IDU.

18.6 GROUNDING CONNECTION

Fig.85 and annexed legend show how to perform the grounding connections.

Indoor 3 4
3 4
ODU
unit
1 5

7 IDU 2
unit

(+) (-)
6
Station Local
ground ground
ground
rack

Legend

1 IDU grounding point, faston type. The cross section area of the cable used must be ≥ 4 sq. mm. The
faston is available on the IDU both sides.

2 ODU grounding bolt. The cross section area of the cable used must be ≥ 16 sq. mm

3 IDU–ODU interconnection cable type Celflex CUH 1/4” terminated with N–type male connectors at
both sides.

4 Grounding kit type Cabel Metal or similar to connect the shield of interconnection cable.

5 Matching cable (tail) terminated with SMA or BNT male and N female connectors.

6 Battery grounding point of IDU to be connected to earth by means of a cable with a section area
2.5 sq. mm. Length ≤ 10 m.

7 Grounding cords connected to a real earth internal of station. The cross section area of the cable
must be ≥ 16 sq. mm

Fig.85 - Grounding connection

134
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
19 MODULAR IDU USER CONNECTIONS

19.1 CONNECTOR POSITION FOR 1+0/1+1 MODULAR VERSION

The user connections are performed through connectors on LIM/CONTROLLER/RIM modules.

The connectors are the following:

• LIM module 16x2 Mbit/s (see Fig.86)

- Trib IN/OUT: connectors 1.0/2.3 female 75 Ohm type or SUB–D 25 pins male 75 Ohm or 120
Ohm type. For SUB–D connector details refer to Tab.20.

• LIM module 4x2 Mbit/s and 3x10/100BaseT (see Fig.87)

- Trib IN/OUT: connectors 1.0/2.3 female 75 Ohm type or SUB–D 25 pins male 75 Ohm or 120
Ohm type. For SUB–D connector details refer to Tab.20.

- 10/100BaseT Ethernet: RJ45 connector.

• Controller module

- LCT:
RS232 type: connector SUB–D, 9 pins male type. For connector detail refer to Tab.22.
USB type – connector “B” receptable. For connector detail refer to USB standard.

- USER IN/OUT: connector SUB–D, 9 pins male type. For connector details refer to Tab.28.

- RS232: connector SUB–D, 9 pins male type. For connector detail see Tab.23.

- Q3: connector or micro SUB–D 15 pins and RJ45. For SUB–D and RJ45 connector details refer
to Tab.21.

- CH1/CH2: connector RJ45. For connector details see Tab.25 and Tab.26.

- 2 Mbit/s: connector RJ45. For connector details see Tab.27.

• RIM module

- connector TNC–50 Ohm for interconnection to ODU

- connector SUB–D, 3 pins for interconnection to battery.

• LIM module 16x2 Mbit/s and 4x10/100BaseT (see Fig.88)

- Trib IN/OUT: connectors SCSI female 50 pins 75 Ohm type and 120 Ohm. For details refer to
Tab.36

- 10/100BaseT Ethernet: RJ45 connector.

LIM RIM

2Mb/s 2Mb/s 2Mb/s 2Mb/s RIM 1


RIM 2
FAIL
+

Trib: A-B-C-D Trib: E-F-G-H Trib: I-J-K-L Trib: M-N-O-P -


IDU ODU TX RX
RIM1
A R 1 WAY
2 SIDE RIM2
Q3
LCT REM TEST CH2 2Mb/s
-
+

USER IN/OUT RS232 CH1

RIM
CONTROLLER

Fig.86 - User connector position, 1+1 version with LIM 16x2 Mbit/s

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


135
C D
A B 1 2 DPLX
3
DPLX DPLX
ACT RIM 1
FAIL ACT ACT LINK RIM 2
LINK LINK
10/100 BTX + -
A IDU ODU TX RX
R 1 WAY RIM 1
Q3 2 SIDE
RIM 2
LCT USER IN/OUT RS232 TEST REM CH1 CH2 2 Mbit/s + -

Fig.87 - User connector position, 1+1 version with LIM 4x2 Mbit/s and 3x10/100BaseT

10-100 BaseT DPX 48V


RIM 1
FAIL RIM 2

+
LINK ACT
Trib: 1-8 Trib: 9-16
IDU ODU
1 2
TX RX
3 4
48V
-
A R 1 WAY RIM 1
Q3 2 SIDE
RIM 2

+
REM TEST
LCT RS232 USER IN/OUT CH1 CH2 2Mb/s -

Fig.88 - User connector position, 1+1 version with LIM 16x2 Mbit/s and 4x10/100BaseT

19.2 MODULAR VERSION CONNECTORS

Tab.20 - Tributary connector pin–out (Sub-D 25 pin male)


a
Pin 120 Ohm impedance 75 Ohm impedance

1 Tributary 1/5/9/13 input (cold wire) Ground

2 Tributary 1/5/9/13 input (hot wire) Tributary 1/5/9/13 input

14 Tributary 1/5/9/13 input (ground) Ground

15 Tributary 1/5/9/13 output (cold wire) Ground

16 Tributary 1/5/9/13 output (hot wire) Tributary 1/5/9/13 output

3 Tributary 1/5/9/13 output (ground) Ground

4 Tributary 2/6/10/14 input (cold wire) Ground

5 Tributary 2/6/10/14 input (hot wire) Tributary 2/6/10/14 input

17 Tributary 2/6/10/14 input (ground) Ground

18 Tributary 2/6/10/14 output (cold wire) Ground

19 Tributary 2/6/10/14 output (hot wire) Tributary 2/6/10/14 output

6 Tributary 2/6/10/14 output (ground) Ground

7 Tributary 3/7/11/15 input (cold wire) Ground

8 Tributary 3/7/11/15 input (hot wire) Tributary 3/7/11/15 input

20 Tributary 3/7/11/15 input (ground) Ground

21 Tributary 3/7/11/15 output (cold wire) Ground

22 Tributary 3/7/11/15 output (hot wire) Tributary 3/7/11/15 output

9 Tributary 3/7/11/15 output (ground) Ground

10 Tributary 4/8/12/16 input (cold wire) Ground

11 Tributary 4/8/12/16 input (hot wire) Tributary 4/8/12/16 input

23 Tributary 4/8/12/16 input (ground) Ground

24 Tributary 4/8/12/16 output (cold wire) Ground

136
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
25 Tributary 4/8/12/16 output (hot wire) Tributary 4/8/12/16 output

12 Tributary 4/8/12/16 output (ground) Ground

13 Ground Ground

a. The 75 Ohm impedance tributary connector pin–out is referred to the flying connectors to be
connected to the equipment connectors.

Tab.21 - Q3 connector pin–out for 10/100BaseT Ethernet connection Pin Description (RJ45)

Pin Description

1 Tx+

2 Tx–

3 Rx+

4 ––

5 ––

6 Rx–

7 ––

8 ––

Tab.22 - LCT connector pin–out for connection to supervision system (Sub-D 9 pin male)

Pin Description

1 ––

2 RxD

3 TxD

4 ––

5 GND

6 ––

7 ––

8 ––

9 ––

Tab.23 - RSR232 connector pin–out for supervision system (Sub-D 9 pin male)

Pin Description

1 Not connected

2 Rx D (IN)

3 Tx D (OUT)

4 Not connected

5 GND

6/7/8/9 --

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


137
Tab.24 - CH1 connector pin–out for 9600 bit/s – V.24 interface (RJ45)

Pin Description

1 CKTx

2 TD

3 DTR

4 DSR

5 GND

6 RD9600

7 CKRx

8 DCD

Tab.25 - CH1 connector pin–out for 1x9600 or 2x4800 kbit/s – V.28 interface (RJ45)

Pin Description

1 ––

2 TD (1° ch 9600 or 4800)

3 TD (2° ch 4800)

4 ––

5 GND

6 RD (1° ch 9600 or 4800)

7 ––

8 RD (2° ch 4800)

Tab.26 - CH2 connector pin–out for 64 kbit/s channel – V.11 interface (RJ45)

Pin Description

1 D–V11–Tx

2 D+V11–Tx

3 C–V11–Tx

4 C+V11–Tx

5 D–V11–Rx

6 D+V11–Rx

7 C–V11–Rx

8 C+V11–Rx

138
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Tab.27 - 2 Mbit/s wayside connector pin–out (RJ45)

Pin Description

1 Tx–C

2 Tx–F

3 GND

4 ––

5 Rx–C

6 Rx–F

7 GND

8 ––

Tab.28 - User in/out connector pin–out for external alarm input and alarm transfer to outside
(Sub-D 9 pin male)

Pin Description

1 C relay contact – branch 1

2 NA/NC relay contact – branch 1

3 C relay contact – branch 2

4 NA/NC relay contact – branch 2

5 User input 01

6 User input 02

7 User input 03

8 User input 04

9 GND

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


139
20 IDU COMPACT USER CONNECTIONS

20.1 CONNECTOR POSITION FOR 1+0/1+1 COMPACT VERSION

User connections are performed through connectors on the IDU front panel modules (see Fig.89). The con-
nectors are the following:

• Trib IN/OUT: 75 or 120 25–pin SUB–D male connector. For SUB–D connector details Fig.89.

• LCT: USB connector B type "Receptacle". For connector detail see USB standard.

• USER IN/OUT: SUB–D male connector. Connector details refer to Tab.34.

• Q3: RJ45 connector. Connector details refer to Tab.30.

• 50 Ohm connector for interconnection to ODU1.

• 48V: 3 pin SUB–D 3W3 connector for interconnection to battery.


• V11: optional service interface. Connector details in Tab.31.

• V.28: optional service interface. Connector details in Tab.32.

• RS232 PPP: optional management interface. Connector details in Tab.33.

Trib. 1–2–3–4 Trib. 9–10–11–12

Q3 LCT USER IN/OUT 48V1 48V2


TX RX PS1
TEST 1
1 2 1 2
R AL 2
Trib. 5–6–7–8 Trib. 13–14–15–16 PS2
+

– –
+

Fig.89 - IDU Compact 1+1 (2x2/4x2/8x2/16x2 Mbit/s)

1 SMA kind: max torque 0.5 Nm

140
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Tab.29 - Tributary connector pin–out (male 25 pin SUB–D)

Pin 120 Ohm impedance Pin 75 Ohm impedancea


1 Tributary 1/5/9/13 input (cold wire) Ground

2 Tributary 1/5/9/13 input (hot wire) 2 Tributary 1/5/9/13 input

14 Tributary 1/5/9/13 input (ground) 14 Ground


15 Tributary 1/5/9/13 output (cold wire) 15 Ground

16 Tributary 1/5/9/13 output (hot wire) 16 Tributary 1/5/9/13 output

3 Tributary 1/5/9/13 output (ground) 3 Ground

4 Tributary 2/6/10/14 input (cold wire) 4 Ground

5 Tributary 2/6/10/14 input (hot wire) 5 Tributary 2/6/10/14 input

17 Tributary 2/6/10/14 input (ground) 17 Ground

18 Tributary 2/6/10/14 output (cold wire) 18 Ground

19 Tributary 2/6/10/14 output (hot wire) 19 Tributary 2/6/10/14 output

6 Tributary 2/6/10/14 output (ground) 6 Ground

7 Tributary 3/7/11/15 input (cold wire) 7 Ground


8 Tributary 3/7/11/15 input (hot wire) 8 Tributary 3/7/11/15 input

20 Tributary 3/7/11/15 input (ground) 20 Ground

21 Tributary 3/7/11/15 output (cold wire) 21 Ground

22 Tributary 3/7/11/15 output (hot wire) 22 Tributary 3/7/11/15 output

9 Tributary 3/7/11/15 output (ground) 9 Ground

10 Tributary 4/8/12/16 input (cold wire) 10 Ground

11 Tributary 4/8/12/16 input (hot wire) 11 Tributary 4/8/12/16 input

23 Tributary 4/8/12/16 input (ground) 23 Ground

24 Tributary 4/8/12/16 output (cold wire) 24 Ground

25 Tributary 4/8/12/16 output (hot wire) 25 Tributary 4/8/12/16 output

12 Tributary 4/8/12/16 output (ground) 12 Ground

13 Ground 13 Ground

a. The 75 Ohm impedance tributary connector pin–out is referred to the flying connectors to be connected
to the equipment connectors.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


141
Tab.30 - Q3 connector pin–out for 10/100BaseT Ethernet connection (RJ45)

Pin Description

1 Tx+

2 Tx-

3 Rx+
4 --

5 --

6 Rx-

7 --

8 --

Tab.31 - S.C. connector pin–out for 64 kbit/s channel – V.11 interface (RJ45)

Pin Description

1 D-V11-Tx
2 D+V11-Tx

3 C-V11-Tx

4 C+V11-Tx

5 D-V11-Rx

6 D+V11-Rx

7 C-V11-Rx

8 C+V11-Rx

Tab.32 - S.C. connector pin–out – V.28 interface (RJ45)

Pin Description

1 RTS

2 TD

3 DTR

4 DSR

5 GND

6 RD

7 CTS

8 DCD

142
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Tab.33 - Connector pin–out – RS232 PPP interface (Sub-D 9 pin male)

Pin Description
1 DCD

2 RD

3 TD

4 DTR

5 GND

6 DSR

7 RTS

8 CTS

9 NC

Tab.34 - User in/out connector pin–out (Sub-D 9 pin male)

Pin Description
1 relay contact

2 NA/NC relay contact

3 User input 01

4 User input 02

5 GND

6 NC

7 User input 03

8 User input 04

9 NC

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


143
21 MODULAR IDU PLUS USER CONNECTIONS

21.1 CONNECTOR POSITION FOR 1+0/1+1 MODULAR IDU PLUS


VERSION

User connections are performed through connectors on the IDU front panel modules.

• IDU with LIM 32x2 Mbit/s or 53x2 Mbit/s (see Fig.90 and Fig.91)

- Trib IN/OUT: 75 and 120 50-pin female connector: for SCSI connector details Tab.35, Tab.36

- LCT: USB connector B type receptable. For connector details see USB standard.

- USER IN/OUT: SUB-D male connector. Connector details refer to Tab.38

- Q3/1 and Q3/2: RJ45 connector. Connector details refer to Tab.37

- 50 Ohm connector for interconnection to ODU


- 48V: SUB-D 3 pin connector for interconnection to battery.

- V11: optional service interface. Connector details in Tab.42

- V.28: optional service interface. Connector details in Tab.41


- RS232 optional management interface. Connector details in Tab.38

- 2 Mbit/s wayside: optional 2 Mbit/s service channel. Connector details in Tab.43

• Besides the previous ones, only for the Nodal version (see Fig.92):
- STM-1 in/out: electric interface with female connector 1.0/2.3 75 Ohm; plug-in module with
electric interface, connector 1.0/2.3; plug-in module with optical interface, LC connector

- NBUS: connect to other Nodal IDU Plus only with cable of Siae code F03471
- 2 Mbit/s in/out: input, 2 MHz signal output with connector 1.0/2.3 at 75 Ohm.

• IDU with LIM 24x2 Mbit/s and 4x10/100BaseT (see Fig.93)

As previous connectors but:

- 10/100BaseT Ethernet connector: RJ45 connector.

FAIL
+

Trib: 1-8 Trib: 9-16


Q3/2 Q3/1
Trib: 17-24
IDU ODU
Trib: 25-32
-
A R WAY
SIDE
+

REM TEST
LCT RS232 USER IN/OUT CH1 CH2 2Mb/s
-

Fig.90 - IDU Plus 1+1 (up to 32x2 Mbit/s)

Q3/2 Q3/1 IDU ODU


A R WAY
SIDE
REM TEST
LCT USER IN/OUT CH1 CH2 2Mb/s
-
+

RS232

FAIL
Trib: 1-8 Trib: 9-16 Trib: 17-24 Trib: 25-32
-
+

FAIL
Trib: 33-40 Trib: 41-48 Trib: 49-53

Fig.91 - IDU Plus 1+1 (up to 53x2 Mbit/s)

144
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Q3/2 Q3/1 IDU ODU
A R WAY
SIDE
REM TEST

+
LCT RS232 USER IN/OUT CH1 CH2 2Mb/s
-
FAIL

+
-
NBUS ON ON

FAIL

+
Trib: 1-8 2MHz 1 2 1 STM1 2 Trib: 9-16
-
FAIL

+
-

Fig.92 - Nodal IDU Plus 2 units - 16x2 Mbit/s + STM1, 4+0 version

10-100 BaseT DPX 48V

FAIL

+
LINK ACT
Trib: 1-8 Trib: 9-16
Q3/2
Trib: 17-24
Q3/1 IDUODU
1 2 3 4 -
A R WAY
SIDE

+
REM TEST
LCT RS232 USER IN/OUT CH1 CH2 2Mb/s
-

Fig.93 - Modular IDU Plus - 24x2 Mbit/s and 4x10/100BaseT

Tab.35 - Tributary IN/OUT - 75 Ohm

Pin 75 Ohm

48 Ground A

23 Tributary 1/9/17/25/33/41/49 input

50 Ground A

25 Tributary 1/9/17/25/33/41/49 output

47 Ground A

22 Tributary 2/10/18/26/34/42/50 input

45 Ground A

20 Tributary 2/10/18/26/34/42/50 output

42 Ground A

17 Tributary 3/11/19/27/35/43/51 input

43 Ground A

18 Tributary 3/11/19/27/35/43/51 output

40 Ground A

15 Tributary 4/12/20/28/36/44/52 input

39 Ground A

14 Tributary 4/12/20/28/36/44/52 output

36 Ground B

11 Tributary 5/13/21/29/37/45/53 input

37 Ground B

12 Tributary 5/13/21/29/37/45/53 output

34 Ground B

9 Tributary 6/14/22/30/38/46 input

33 Ground B

8 Tributary 6/14/22/30/38/46 output

29 Ground B

4 Tributary 7/15/23/31/39/47 input

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


145
31 Ground B

6 Tributary 7/15/23/31/39/47 output

28 Ground B

3 Tributary 8/16/24/32/40/48 input

26 Ground B

1 Tributary 8/16/24/32/40/48 output

Note: Join pin 44 with ground A pins, join pin 32 with ground B pins.

25 1
.........................

.........................
50 26

Fig.94 - Pin-out Tributary 50 pin SCSI female

146
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Tab.36 - Tributary IN/OUT - 120 Ohm (50 pin SCSI female)

Pin 120 Ohm

49 Tributary 1/9/17/25/33/41/49 input

23 Tributary 1/9/17/25/33/41/49 input

44 Ground A

24 Tributary 1/9/17/25/33/41/49 output

25 Tributary 1/9/17/25/33/41/49 output

44 Ground A

21 Tributary 2/10/18/26/34/42/50 input

22 Tributary 2/10/18/26/34/42/50 input

44 Ground A

46 Tributary 2/10/18/26/34/42/50 output

20 Tributary 2/10/18/26/34/42/50 output

44 Ground A

16 Tributary 3/11/19/27/35/43/51 input

17 Tributary 3/11/19/27/35/43/51 input

44 Ground A

19 Tributary 3/11/19/27/35/43/51 output

18 Tributary 3/11/19/27/35/43/51 output

44 Ground A

41 Tributary 4/12/20/28/36/44/52 input

15 Tributary 4/12/20/28/36/44/52 input

44 Ground A

13 Tributary 4/12/20/28/36/44/52 output

14 Tributary 4/12/20/28/36/44/52 output

44 Ground A

10 Tributary 5/13/21/29/37/45/53 input

11 Tributary 5/13/21/29/37/45/53 input

32 Ground B

38 Tributary 5/13/21/29/37/45/53 output

12 Tributary 5/13/21/29/37/45/53 output

32 Ground B

35 Tributary 6/14/22/30/38/46 input

9 Tributary 6/14/22/30/38/46 input

32 Ground B

7 Tributary 6/14/22/30/38/46 output

8 Tributary 6/14/22/30/38/46 output

32 Ground B

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


147
5 Tributary 7/15/23/31/39/47 input

4 Tributary 7/15/23/31/39/47 input

32 Ground B

30 Tributary 7/15/23/31/39/47 output

6 Tributary 7/15/23/31/39/47 output

32 Ground B

27 Tributary 8/16/24/32/40/48 input

3 Tributary 8/16/24/32/40/48 input

32 Ground B

2 Tributary 8/16/24/32/40/48 output

1 Tributary 8/16/24/32/40/48 output

32 Ground B

Tab.37 - Q3/1 and Q3/2 100BaseT connector pin-out for 10/100BaseT Ethernet connection
(RJ45)

Pin Description

1 Tx+

2 Tx-

3 Rx+

4 --

5 --

6 Rx-

7 --

8 --

Tab.38 - Connector pin-out RS232 PPP interface (SUBD 9 pin male)

Pin Description

1 DCD (IN)

2 RD (IN)

3 TD (OUT)

4 DTR (OUT)

5 GND

6 Not connected

7 RTS (OUT)

8 CTS (IN)

9 Not connected

148
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Tab.39 - CH1 connector pin-out for 9600 bit/s synchronous V.24 interface (RJ45)

Pin Description

1 CKTx (OUT)

2 TD (IN)

3 DTR (IN)

4 DSR (OUT)

5 GND

6 RD9600 (OUT)

7 CKRx (OUT)

8 DCD (OUT)

Tab.40 - CH1 connector pin-out for 9600 bit/s asynchronous V.24 interface (RJ45)

Pin Description

1 --

2 TxD (IN)

3 DTR (IN)

4 DSR

5 GND

6 RxD (OUT)

7 --

8 DCD (OUT)

Tab.41 - CH1 connector pin-out for 1x9600 or 2x4800 kbit/s V.28 interface (RJ45)

Pin Description

1 --

2 TD (1° ch 9600 or 4800) (IN)

3 TD (2° ch 4800) (IN)

4 --

5 GND

6 RD (1° ch 9600 or 4800) (OUT)

7 --

8 RD (2° ch 4800) (OUT)

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


149
Tab.42 - CH2 connector pin-out for 64 kbit/s channel - V.11 interface (RJ45)

Pin Description

1 D-V11-Tx

2 D+V11-Tx

3 C-V11-Tx

4 C+V11-Tx

5 D-V11-Rx

6 D+V11-Rx

7 C-V11-Rx

8 C+V11-Rx

Tab.43 - 2 Mbit/s wayside connector pin-out (RJ45)

Pin Description

1 Tx-C (IN) common

2 TX-F (IN) 120 Ohm

3 GND

4 TX-F (IN) 75 Ohm

5 Rx-C (OUT) common

6 Rx-F (OUT) 120 Ohm

7 GND

8 Rx-F (OUT) 75 Ohm

Tab.44 - User IN/OUT connector pin-out (SUBD 9 pin male)

Pin Description

1 C relay contact- branch 1

2 NA/NC relay contact - branch 1

3 C relay contact - branch 2

4 NA/NC relay contact - branch 2

5 User input 01

6 User input 02

7 User input 03

8 User input 04

9 Ground

150
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
22 IDU COMPACT PLUS USER CONNECTIONS

22.1 CONNECTOR USE FOR 1+0/1+1 IDU COMPACT PLUS VERSION

User connections are performed through connectors on the IDU front panel modules (see Fig.95 and
Fig.96). The connectors are the following:

• Trib IN/OUT: 75 and 120 50-pin female connector: for SCSI connector details Tab.45, Tab.46

• LCT: USB connector B type receptable. For connector details see USB standard.

• USER IN/OUT: SUB-D male connector. Connector details refer to Tab.51

• Q3/1 and Q3/2: RJ45 connector. Connector details refer to Tab.47

• 50 Ohm connector for interconnection to ODU

• 48V: SUB-D 3 pin connector for interconnection to battery.


• V11: optional service interface. Connector details in Tab.50

• V.28: optional service interface. Connector details in Tab.49

V11 RS232

M 3.15A 48VDC
250VAC PS
TEST
R AL
+

Q3/2 Q3/1 LCT USER IN/OUT Trib. 1-8 Trib. 9-16 -

Fig.95 - IDU Compact Plus 1+0 (16E1)

V11 RS232 Trib. 17-24 Trib. 25-32 DPX


1 2 3
ACT LINK
10/100 BaseT
TX RX PS
TEST 1 1
1 2 1 2
R AL 2 2
1 2
+

Q3/2 Q3/1 LCT USER IN/OUT Trib. 1-8 Trib. 9-16 M 3.15A 250VAC - 48VDC 48VDC - M 3.15A 250VAC

Fig.96 - IDU Compact Plus 1+1 (32E1 + 3ETH)

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


151
Tab.45 - Tributary IN/OUT - 75 Ohm (50 pin SCSI female)

Pin 75 Ohm

48 Ground A

23 Tributary 1/9/17/25/33/41/49 input

50 Ground A
25 Tributary 1/9/17/25/33/41/49 output

47 Ground A

22 Tributary 2/10/18/26/34/42/50 input

45 Ground A

20 Tributary 2/10/18/26/34/42/50 output

42 Ground A

17 Tributary 3/11/19/27/35/43/51 input

43 Ground A

18 Tributary 3/11/19/27/35/43/51 output

40 Ground A

15 Tributary 4/12/20/28/36/44/52 input

39 Ground A

14 Tributary 4/12/20/28/36/44/52 output


36 Ground B

11 Tributary 5/13/21/29/37/45/53 input

37 Ground B
12 Tributary 5/13/21/29/37/45/53 output

34 Ground B

9 Tributary 6/14/22/30/38/46 input


33 Ground B

8 Tributary 6/14/22/30/38/46 output

29 Ground B

4 Tributary 7/15/23/31/39/47 input

31 Ground B

6 Tributary 7/15/23/31/39/47 output

28 Ground B

3 Tributary 8/16/24/32/40/48 input

26 Ground B
1 Tributary 8/16/24/32/40/48 output

Note: Join pin 44 with ground A pins, join pin 32 with ground B pins.

25 1
.........................

.........................
50 26

Fig.97 - Pin-out Tributary 50 pin SCSI female

152
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Tab.46 - Tributary IN/OUT - 120 Ohm (50 pin SCSI female)

Pin 120 Ohm

49 Tributary 1/9/17/25/33/41/49 input

23 Tributary 1/9/17/25/33/41/49 input

44 Ground A

24 Tributary 1/9/17/25/33/41/49 output

25 Tributary 1/9/17/25/33/41/49 output

44 Ground A

21 Tributary 2/10/18/26/34/42/50 input

22 Tributary 2/10/18/26/34/42/50 input

44 Ground A

46 Tributary 2/10/18/26/34/42/50 output

20 Tributary 2/10/18/26/34/42/50 output

44 Ground A

16 Tributary 3/11/19/27/35/43/51 input

17 Tributary 3/11/19/27/35/43/51 input

44 Ground A

19 Tributary 3/11/19/27/35/43/51 output

18 Tributary 3/11/19/27/35/43/51 output

44 Ground A

41 Tributary 4/12/20/28/36/44/52 input

15 Tributary 4/12/20/28/36/44/52 input

44 Ground A

13 Tributary 4/12/20/28/36/44/52 output

14 Tributary 4/12/20/28/36/44/52 output

44 Ground A

10 Tributary 5/13/21/29/37/45/53 input

11 Tributary 5/13/21/29/37/45/53 input

32 Ground B

38 Tributary 5/13/21/29/37/45/53 output

12 Tributary 5/13/21/29/37/45/53 output

32 Ground B

35 Tributary 6/14/22/30/38/46 input

9 Tributary 6/14/22/30/38/46 input

32 Ground B

7 Tributary 6/14/22/30/38/46 output

8 Tributary 6/14/22/30/38/46 output

32 Ground B

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


153
5 Tributary 7/15/23/31/39/47 input

4 Tributary 7/15/23/31/39/47 input

32 Ground B

30 Tributary 7/15/23/31/39/47 output

6 Tributary 7/15/23/31/39/47 output

32 Ground B

27 Tributary 8/16/24/32/40/48 input

3 Tributary 8/16/24/32/40/48 input

32 Ground B

2 Tributary 8/16/24/32/40/48 output

1 Tributary 8/16/24/32/40/48 output

32 Ground B

Tab.47 - Q3/1 and Q3/2 100BaseT connector pin-out for 10/100BaseT Ethernet connection
(RJ45)

Pin Description

1 Tx+

2 Tx-

3 Rx+

4 --

5 --

6 Rx-

7 --

8 --

Tab.48 - Connector pin-out RS232 PPP interface (RJ45)

Pin Description

1 RTS (OUT)

2 Tx (OUT)

3 DTR (OUT)

4 DSR (IN)

5 GND

6 Rx (IN)

7 CTS (IN)

8 DCD (IN)

154
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Tab.49 - V11 connector pin-out for 9600 bit/s asynchronous V.24 interface (RJ45)

Pin Description

1 RTS (IN)

2 TxD (IN)

3 DTR (IN)

4 DSR (OUT)

5 GND

6 RxD (OUT)

7 CTS (OUT)

8 DCD (OUT)

Tab.50 - V11 connector pin-out for 1x9600 or 2x4800 kbit/s V.28 asynchronous interface
(RJ45)

Pin Description

1 --

2 TD (1° ch 9600 or 4800) (IN)

3 TD (2° ch 4800) (IN)

4 --

5 GND

6 RD (1° ch 9600 or 4800) (OUT)

7 --

8 RD (2° ch 4800) (OUT)

Tab.51 - V11 connector pin-out for 64 kbit/s channel - V.11 interface (RJ45)

Description for
Pin Description for V11
contradirectional

1 D-V11-Tx (IN) D-Tx (IN)

2 D+V11-Tx (IN) D+Tx (IN)

3 C-V11-Tx (OUT)

4 C+V11-Tx (OUT)

5 D-V11-Rx (OUT) D-Rx (OUT)

6 D+V11-Rx (OUT) D+Rx (OUT)

7 C-V11-Rx (OUT)

8 C+V11-Rx (OUT)

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


155
Tab.52 - User IN/OUT connector pin-out (SUBD 9 pin male)

Pin Description

1 C relay contact

2 NA/NC relay contact

3 User input 01

4 User input 02

5 GND

6 NC

7 User input 03

8 User input 04

9 NC

156
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
23 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU
WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA

23.1 INSTALLATION KIT

Following installation kits are supplied with the equipment depending on different versions:

• 1+0 version

- antisliding strip (see Fig.98)

- supporting plate plus 60–114 mm pole fixing bracket and relevant nuts and bolts (see Fig.99)

- adapting tools and relevant bolts and nuts for 219 mm pole (see Fig.100)

- Band-it fixing system (see Fig.103)

- antenna side flange, variable as function of RF frequency (see Fig.101)

- support with ODU fast locking mechanism (see Fig.99)

- connection to the antenna with flexible wave guide and possible use of a rigid elbow (optional)
(see Fig.101)

- kit for ground connection making part of ODU

• 1+0 version (6 GHz only)

Besides the previous items a specific flange adaptor (kit V32409) must be used (see Fig.109). The
flange is UDR70.

• 1+1 version
- antisliding strip (see Fig.98)

- supporting plate plus pole fixing bracket and relevant nuts and bolts (see Fig.99)

- adapting tools and relevant bolts and nuts for 219 mm pole (see Fig.100)

- hybrid with ODU fast locking mechanism (see Fig.102)

- flexible waveguide trunk for connection to antenna (optional) (see Fig.101)

- kit for ground connection making part of the two ODUs.

• 1+1 version (6 GHz only)

Besides the previous items a specific flange adaptor (kit V32415) must be used (see Fig.110). The
flange is UDR70.
• 1+0/1+1 4 GHz version is fully described in chapter 28 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE 4
GHz ODU WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA (KIT V32323)

Warning: in order to avoid damages to flexible waveguides, don’t fold or twist them more than values
specified as limit in installation instructions of the waveguide supplier.

In case of flexible wave guide use, Tab.55 shows the maximum bending radius.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


157
23.2 REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED)

• N.2 13mm torque wrench

• N.1 15 mm torque wrench

• N.1 17 mm torque wrench


• N.1 3 mm Allen wrench

Warning: if screwing operation concerns more than one screw or bolt, tighten subsequently everyone and
its opposite, step by step.

23.3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Installation procedure proceeds according to the following steps:

• Version 1+0: installation onto the pole of the supporting plate 2

• Version 1+0: installation onto the pole of the support plate by Band-it
• Version 1+1: installation onto the pole of the supporting plate 2

• Installation of the ODU (common to both 1+0 and 1+1 version)

• ODU grounding

1+0 version – Installation onto the pole of the supporting plate

Fig.98 – Mount antislide strip around the pole. The position of the plastic blocks depends on the position
of the supporting plate (see next step)

Fig.99 – Adhere the supporting plate to the antisliding strip plastic blocks and then secure it to the pole
through the fixing bracket for 60–114 mm pole (see Fig.99). Bolts and nuts are available on the supporting
plate. Tightening torque must be 32 Nm.

Warning: As shown in Fig.100 an adapting kit must be used for the 219 mm pole. It consists of an addi-
tional plate to enlarge the standard supporting plate dimension and relevant U–bolt for 219 mm pole fixing.

Fig.101 – Fix the flexible waveguide to the antenna side flange. Four fixing screws are available the dimen-
sions of which depend on the waveguide type. Tighten progressively and alternatively the four screws with
the following torque:

Tab.53 - Torques for tightening screws

Frequencies Screw Tool Torque

from 18 to 38 GHz Allen screw M3 Allen key 2.5 mm 1 Nm

up to 15 GHz Allen screw M4 Allen key 3 mm 2 Nm

Fig.101 – Fix the antenna side flange to the support with ODU fast locking mechanism. The flange can be
mounted horizontally (as shown in Fig.101) or vertically as function of convenience.

Fig.102 – Fix the support with ODU fast locking mechanism to the supporting plate making use of available
bolts and nuts. Fig.102 shows the possible positions. Tightening torque must be 18 Nm.

2 In case of 219 mm pole, an adapting kit is supplied for the purpose.

158
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
1+0 version – Installation onto the pole of the supporting plate by Band-it

In case of 1+0 ODU installation, a Band-it pole mounting kit can be used: through slots (see Fig.103) on
the supporting plate two metallic bands secure the plate on the pole. Band characteristics are:

• thickness 0.76 mm

• width 19 mm.

It is also possible to use the anti-sliding system (optional).

1+1 version – Installation onto the pole of the supporting plate

Fig.98 – Mount antislide strip around the pole. The position of the plastic blocks depends on the position
of the supporting plate (see next step)

Fig.99 – Position the supporting plate to the antisliding strip plastic blocks and then secure it to the pole
through the fixing bracket for 60–114 mm pole (see Fig.99). Bolts and nuts are available on the supporting
plate kit. Tightening torque must be 32 Nm.

Fig.104 – Secure the hybrid with ODU fast locking mechanism to the supporting plate using bolt and nuts
available on the support plate. Tightening torque must be 18 Nm.
Remove the plastic cover from the hybrid flange sides.

Warning: Do not remove the foil from the hybrid flange sides.

Fig.104 – Fix the flexible waveguide to the antenna side flange. Four fixing screws are available the dimen-
sions of which depend on the waveguide type. Tighten progressively and alternatively the four screws with
the following torque:

Tab.54 - Torques for tightening screws

Frequencies Screw Tool Torque

from 18 to 38 GHz Allen screw M3 Allen key 2.5 mm 1 Nm

up to 15 GHz Allen screw M4 Allen key 3 mm 2 Nm

Warning: It is advisable to shape the waveguide flexible trunk, connecting ODU flange with antenna flange
as shown in Fig.107. This avoids possible condensate to be channelled towards the ODU flange.

Installation of the ODU

1 Remove the plastic cover from the ODU flange side. Apply silicon grease e.g. type RHODOSIL PATE
4 to the O–ring of Fig.106.
Warning: Do not remove the foil from the flange.

2 Bring the ODU with the two hands and position the ODU handle at the bottom side.

3 Position the ODU body close to the support with ODU fast locking mechanism and align ODU side
flange (see Fig.106) to antenna side flange (see Fig.101 – 1+0 version) or hybrid side flange (see
Fig.104 – 1+1 version).
Note: For 1+0 version the ODU can assume positions of Fig.105 depending on the polarisation.

4 With respect to the flange alignment, turn the ODU body approx. 30° anti–clockwise and then insert
the ODU body into the support and search for alignment between reference tooth on the support
(see Fig.101 – 1+0 version or Fig.104 – 1+1 version) and ODU body reference tooth (see detail
Fig.106)

5 When alignment is achieved, turn the ODU body clockwise until “clack” is heard and the ODU rota-
tion stops.

6 Secure ODU body on the support by tightening bolts (1) (see Fig.101 – 1+0 version or Fig.104 –
1+1 version). Tightening torque must be 6 Nm.
Final assembly of 1+1 version is shown in Fig.107. A parasol mounting is optionally possible.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


159
23.4 GROUNDING

The ODU must be connected to ground making reference to details of Fig.108.

Tab.55 - Waveguide bending radius according to frequency

Bending radius Bending radius Bending radius Bending radius


without rebending without rebending with rebending with rebending
Frequency
mm (inch) mm (inch) mm (inch) mm (inch)
E-plane a H-plane b E-plane a. H-plane b.

6 GHz or 7 GHz
200 (7,9) 500 (19,8) 300 (11,9) 600 (23,7)
low

7 GHz high 200 (7,9) 500 (19,8) 250 (9,9) 600 (23,7)

11 GHz 130 (5,1) 280 (11,0) 150 (5,9) 300 (11,9)

13 GHz 130 (5,1) 280 (11,0) 150 (5,9) 300 (11,9)

15 GHz 130 (5,1) 280 (11,0) 150 (5,9) 300 (11,9)

18 GHz 130 (5,1) 280 (11,0) 150 (5,9) 300 (11,9)

23 GHz 110 (4,3) 230 (9,1) 130 (5,1) 250 (9,9)

38 GHz 80 (3,1) 140 (5,5) 90 (3,6) 150 (5,9)

a. Bending E-plane

Rmin/E
Bending E-plane
(short side of the section)

b. Bending H-plane

Rmin/H
Bending H-plane
(long side of the section)

160
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Plastic blocks
Antisliding strip

Fig.98 - Antisliding strip

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


161
Use 17 mm wrench
(32Nm torque)

Supporting plate

Use 15 mm wrench
(32Nm torque)

Fig.99 - 60–114 mm pole supporting plate fixing

162
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Fig.100 - Adapting kit for 219 mm pole

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


163
In option

Antenna side flange

Support with ODU fast


lockinh mechanism

Dente di riferimento

Reference tooth

1
1

Position of antenna
side flange

1 13 mm wrench
6 Nm torque

Fig.101 - Mounting position

164
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
A

Adapting kit for 219 mm pole

B C

Fig.102 - Possible positions of the support with ODU fast locking mechanism

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


165
Fig.103 - Band-it pole mounting kit

166
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Use 13 mm wrench
(18 Nm torque)

Hybrid with ODU fast


locking mechanism

Reference tooth Reference tooth

Optional vawe
guide

RT1 RT2

Fig.104 - Installation onto the pole of the supporting plate

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


167
Vertical Horizontal

Fig.105 - Position of the ODU body depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polari-
sation is always vertical: handle at the left side.

168
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Reference tooth

O-ring
ODU side flange

AL version

"N"

"BNC"

Ground bolt

AS version

Fig.106 - ODU body reference tooth

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


169
AL version
Suncover (optional)

AS version

Fig.107 - Final ODU assembly of 1+1 version

170
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
1
2
3

4
5
AL version

AS version

Fig.108 - ODU grounding

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


171
Spring

Washer

Screw M5x25

UDR70 antenna flange

Screw M4x8

Fig.109 - Kit V32409

172
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
UDR70 flange

Screw M4x18
Spring

Washer

O-Ring

Hybrid 6 GHz
(balanced or
unbalanced)

Fig.110 - Kit V32415

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


173
24 INSTALLATION ONTO THE WALL OF THE ODU
WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA

24.1 INSTALLATION KIT

Following installation kits are supplied with the equipment depending on different versions:

• 1+0 version

- wall supporting plate with additional contact surface extension plates (see Fig.111)

- antenna side flange, variable as function of RF frequency (see Fig.112)

- support with ODU fast locking mechanism (see Fig.112)

- connection to the antenna with flexible wave guide and possible use of a rigid elbow (optional)
(see Fig.112)

- kit for ground connection making part of ODU

• 1+0 version (6 GHz only)

Besides the previous items a specific flange adaptor (kit V32409) must be used (see Fig.119). The
flange is UDR70.

• 1+1 version
- supporting plate with additional contact surface extension tools (see Fig.111)

- hybrid with ODU fast locking mechanism (see Fig.114)

- connection to the antenna with flexible wave guide and possible use of a rigid elbow (optional)
(see Fig.112)

- kit for ground connection making part of the two ODUs.

• 1+1 version (6 GHz only)

Besides the previous items a specific flange adaptor (kit V32415) must be used (see Fig.120). The
flange is UDR70.

• 1+0/1+1 4 GHz version is fully described in chapter 28 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE 4
GHz ODU WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA (KIT V32323)

In case of flexible wave guide use, Tab.58 shows the maximum bending radius.

24.2 REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED)

• N.2 13mm torque wrench

• N.1 15 mm torque wrench

• N.1 17 mm torque wrench

• N.1 3 mm allen wrench.

Warning: if screwing operation concerns more than one screw or bolt, tighten subsequently everyone and
its opposite, step by step.

174
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
24.3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Installation procedure proceeds according to the following steps:

• version 1+0: installation onto the wall of the supporting plate

• version 1+1: installation onto the wall of the supporting plate


• installation of the ODU (common to both 1+0 and 1+1 version)

• ODU grounding.

1+0 version – Installation onto the wall of the supporting plate

Fig.111 – Fix on the supporting plate the two supplied extension plates to increase the wall contact surface.

Fig.111 – Secure the supporting plate on the wall using the more suitable screws.

Fig.112 – Fix the flexible waveguide to the antenna side flange. Four fixing screws are available the dimen-
sions of which depend on the waveguide type. Tighten progressively and alternatively the four screws with
the following torque:

Tab.56 - Torques for tightening screws

Frequencies Screw Tool Torque

from 18 to 38 GHz Allen screw M3 Allen key 2.5 mm 1 Nm

up to 15 GHz Allen screw M4 Allen key 3 mm 2 Nm

Fig.112 – Fix the antenna side flange to the support with ODU fast locking mechanism. The flange can be
mounted horizontally (as shown in Fig.112) or vertically as function of convenience.

Fig.113 – Fix the support with ODU fast locking mechanism to the supporting plate making use of available
bolts and nuts. Fig.113 shows three possible positions. Tightening torque must be 18 Nm.

1+1 version – Installation onto the wall of the supporting plate

Fig.111 – Fix on the supporting plate the two supplied extension plates to increase the wall contact surface.

Fig.111 – Secure the supporting plate on the wall using the more suitable screws.

Fig.114 – Secure the hybrid with ODU fast locking mechanism to the supporting plate using bolt and nuts
available on the support plate. Tightening torque must be 18 Nm.
Remove the plastic cover from the hybrid flange sides.

Warning: Do not remove the foil from the hybrid flange sides.

Fig.114 – Fix the flexible waveguide to the antenna side flange. Four fixing screws are available the dimen-
sions of which depend on the waveguide type. Tighten progressively and alternatively the four screws with
the following torque:

Tab.57 - Torques for tightening screws

Frequencies Screw Tool Torque

from 18 to 38 GHz Allen screw M3 Allen key 2.5 mm 1 Nm

up to 15 GHz Allen screw M4 Allen key 3 mm 2 Nm

Warning: It is advisable to shape the waveguide flexible trunk, connecting ODU flange with antenna flange
as shown in Fig.117 This avoids possible condensate to be channelled towards the ODU flange.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


175
Installation of the ODU

1 Remove the plastic cover from the ODU flange side. Apply silicon grease e.g. type RHODOSIL PATE
4 to the O–ring of Fig.116.
Warning: Do not remove the foil from the flange.

2 Bring the ODU with the two hands and position the ODU handle at the bottom side.

3 Position the ODU body close to the support with ODU fast locking mechanism and align ODU side
flange (see Fig.116) to antenna side flange (see Fig.112 – 1+0 version) or hybrid side flange (see
Fig.114 – 1+1 version).

Note: For 1+0 version the ODU can assume positions of Fig.115 depending on the polarisation.

4 With respect to the flange alignment, turn the ODU body approx. 30° anti–clockwise and then insert
the ODU body into the support and search for alignment between reference tooth on the support
(see Fig.112 – 1+0 version or Fig.114 – 1+1 version) and ODU body reference tooth (see detail
Fig.116)

5 When alignment is achieved, turn the ODU body clockwise until “clack” is heard and the ODU rota-
tion stops.

6 Secure ODU body on the support by tightening bolts (1) (see Fig.112 – 1+0 version or Fig.114 –
1+1 version). Tightening torque must be 6 Nm.

Final assembly of 1+1 version is shown in Fig.117. A parasol mounting is optionally possible.

176
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
24.4 GROUNDING

The ODU must be connected to ground making reference to details of Fig.118.

Tab.58 - Waveguide bending radius according to frequency

Bending radius Bending radius Bending radius Bending radius


without rebending without rebending with rebending with rebending
Frequency
mm (inch) mm (inch) mm (inch) mm (inch)
E-plane a H-plane b E-plane a. H-plane b.

6 GHz or 7 GHz
200 (7,9) 500 (19,8) 300 (11,9) 600 (23,7)
low

7 GHz high 200 (7,9) 500 (19,8) 250 (9,9) 600 (23,7)

11 GHz 130 (5,1) 280 (11,0) 150 (5,9) 300 (11,9)

13 GHz 130 (5,1) 280 (11,0) 150 (5,9) 300 (11,9)

15 GHz 130 (5,1) 280 (11,0) 150 (5,9) 300 (11,9)

18 GHz 130 (5,1) 280 (11,0) 150 (5,9) 300 (11,9)

23 GHz 110 (4,3) 230 (9,1) 130 (5,1) 250 (9,9)

38 GHz 80 (3,1) 140 (5,5) 90 (3,6) 150 (5,9)

a. Bending E-plane

Rmin/E
Bending E-plane
(short side of the section)

b. Bending H-plane

Rmin/H
Bending H-plane
(long side of the section)

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


177
Extension plate

Supporting plate

M8 bolt and nut

Another possible fixation

Fig.111 - Wall supporting plate

178
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
In option

Antenna side flange

Support with ODU fast


locking mechanism

Reference tooth

Reference tooth

1
1

13 mm wrench
6 Nm torque

Position of antenna
side flange

Fig.112 - Support with ODU fast locking mechanism

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


179
Fig.113 - Mounting possible positions

180
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Use 13 mm wrench
(18 Nm torque)

Hybrid with ODU fast


locking mechanism

Reference tooth Reference tooth

Optional wave
guide

RT1 RT2

Fig.114 - Installation onto the wall of the supporting plate

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


181
Vertical Horizontal

Fig.115 - Position of the ODU body depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polari-
sation is always vertical: handle at the left side.

182
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Reference tooth

O-ring
ODU side flange

AL version

"N"

"BNC"

Ground bolt

AS version

Fig.116 - ODU body reference tooth

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


183
Suncover (optional)

AL version

AS version

Fig.117 - Final ODU assembly of 1+1 version

184
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
1
2
3

4
5

AL version

AS version

1 Bolt

2 Spring washer

3 Flat washer

4 Earth cable collar

5 Flat washer

Fig.118 - ODU grounding

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


185
Spring

Washer

Screw M5x25

UDR70 antenna flange

Screw M4x8

Fig.119 - Kit V32409

186
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
UDR70 flange

Screw M4x18
Spring

Washer

O-Ring

Hybrid 6 GHz
(balanced or
unbalanced)

Fig.120 - Kit V32415

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


187
25 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU
WITH INTEGRATED ANTENNA

25.1 FOREWORD

The installation onto the pole of the ODU with integrated antenna concerns both 1+0 and 1+1 versions.

25.2 INSTALLATION KIT

Following installation kits are supplied with the equipment depending on different versions:

1+0 version

• 60 to 114 mm pole mounting kit consisting of:

- centring ring and relevant screws (see Fig.121)

- antislide strip (see Fig.122)

- pole support system and pole fixing brackets (see Fig.123)

- ODU with O–ring and devices for ground connection

1+1 version

• pole mounting kit from 60 to 114 mm for 1+1 consisting of:

- centring ring and relevant screws (see Fig.121)

- antislide strip (see Fig.122)

- pole support system and pole fixing brackets (see Fig.123)

• hybrid mechanical body (see Fig.132)

• polarization twist disk (see Fig.134)

• 2 ODUs with O–rings and devices for ground connection.

188
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
25.3 REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED)

• N.2 13 mm torque wrench

• N.1 15 mm torque wrench

• N.1 17 mm torque wrench

• N.1 3 mm allen wrench.

Warning: if screwing operation concerns more than one screw or bolt, tighten subsequently everyone and
its opposite, step by step.

25.4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Installation procedure proceeds according with the following steps:

1+0 version

1 installation onto the pole of the support system


2 installation of the antenna

3 installation of ODU

4 antenna aiming
5 ODU grounding

1+1 version

1 installation onto the pole of the support system

2 installation of the antenna

3 installation of hybrid circuit

4 installation of the two ODUs

5 antenna aiming

6 ODU grounding.

25.4.1 Installation onto the pole of the support system and the antenna

Fig.121 – Set the antenna in such a position as to be able to operate on its rear side. Locate the five thread-
ed holes around antenna flange. Mount centring ring onto antenna flange and tight it with 3 calibrated
bolts.
Caution: centring ring should be mounted so that the screws do not stick out.

Define if the antenna will be mounted with vertical or horizontal polarization. Check that free drain holes
stay at bottom side. Mount bolt type M10x30, in position A leaving it loose of 2 cm approx. With horizontal
polarization mount bolt type M10x30 in position D, leaving it loose of 2 cm approx.

Fig.122 – Mount antislide strip onto the pole. Place blocks as in Fig.122 following antenna aiming direction.
Tighten the strip with screwdriver.

Fig.123 – Mount pole supporting system with relevant pole fixing brackets following antenna aiming direc-
tion as indicated by arrow. Antislide strip should result at the centre of supporting plate. Supporting system
should lean against antislide clamp with the tooth as in Fig.124. Position the antenna in such a way that

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


189
bolt in position A or D of Fig.121 cross through hole E of Fig.125. Secure the support system to the pole
by means of the pole fixing brackets and relevant fixing bolts.

Fig.126 – Rotate the antenna body until the remainder three antenna holes coincide with the three support
holes. Secure the antenna to the support by thightening the relevant passing through bolts.

25.4.2 Installation of ODU

1+0 version

1 Apply silicon grease e.g. RHODOSIL PATE 4” to the O–ring (4) of Fig.129 by protecting finger hands
with gloves.

2 Bring the ODU with the two hands and position the ODU handle at the bottom side. The ODU handle
can assume position of Fig.127 depending on the polarization.

3 Position the ODU body near the support system and align ODU side flange to antenna side flange
(see Fig.128). With respect to the flange alignment, turn the ODU body approx. 30° anti–clockwise
and then insert the ODU body into the support and search for alignment between reference tooth
on the support (see Fig.128) and ODU body reference tooth (see detail of Fig.129).

4 When alignment is achieved, turn the ODU body clockwise until “clack” is heard and the ODU rota-
tion stops.
Fig.130 and Fig.131 show ODU housing final position for vertical and horizontal polarization respec-
tively.

5 Secure ODU body on the support system by tightening bolts (1) of Fig.128.

1+1 version

Fig.132 – Apply silicon grease, type “RHODOSIL PATE 4” to O–rings (1). Insert O–rings (1) and (6) into
twist polarization disk (2).

Vertical polarization

Fix the disk on hybrid flange placing marker (4), on disk, close to V mark.

Horizontal polarization

Fix the disk on hybrid flange placing reference (4), on disk, close to H mark.

In 13 GHz and 15 GHz ODUs the polarization disk is fixed to the hybrid flange by means of 3 screws as
shown in Fig.133.

Caution: Twist disk has two planes. Take care of position marker (4) on twist disk. The position of marker
(4) plane should be in contact to hybrid like in figure. Tighten progressively and alternatively screws (7)
with the same number of spring washers (8) with the following torque:

Tab.59 - Torques for tightening screws

Frequencies Screw Tool Torque

from 18 to 38 GHz Allen screw M3 Allen key 2.5 mm 1 Nm

up to 15 GHz Allen screw M4 Allen key 3 mm 2 Nm

Fig.134 – Fix hybrid to support system with four bolts (1) taking care of RT1/RT2 position shown by labels
of Fig.134. Tighten progressively and alternatively four bolts (1).

190
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
25.4.3 ODU installation

The installation procedure of the two ODUs is the same.

1 Apply silicon grease e.g. RHODOSIL PATE 4” to the O–ring (4) of the Fig.129 by protecting finger
hands with gloves.

2 Bring the ODU with the two hands and position the ODU handle at the bottom side. For 1+0 the
ODU can assune position of Fig.127 depending on the polarisation. For 1+1 the handle ODU position
is always placed at the right side (horizontal polarization).

3 Position the ODU body near the support system and align ODU side flange to antenna side flange
(see Fig.128). With respect to the flange alignment, turn the ODU body approx. 30° anti–clockwise
and then insert the ODU body into the support and search for alignment between reference tooth
on the support (see Fig.128) and ODU body reference tooth (see detail of Fig.129).

4 When alignment is achieved, turn the ODU body clockwise until “clack” is heard and the ODU rota-
tion stops.
Fig.130 and Fig.131 show ODU housing final position for vertical and horizontal polarization respec-
tively for 1+0 version.
Fig.135 shows ODU housing final position for 1+1 version.

5 Secure ODU body on the support system by tightening bolts (1) of Fig.128.

25.5 ANTENNA AIMING

Antenna aiming for 1+0 version and 1+1 version is the same. The antenna aiming devices allow to perform
the following adjustments with respect to the starting aiming position:

- Horizontal ± 15° operating on the nut (3) shown in Fig.136, only after having loosen
the nuts (7), (8), (9), (10) of Fig.137.

- vertical ± 15° operating on vertical adjustment worm screw (2) shown in Fig.136
only after having loosen nuts (1), (2), (11) of Fig.137 and (4) and (5) of
Fig.136.
For adjustment from 0° to +30° extract nut (1) Fig.137 and position it in
hole (4), extract nut (2) Fig.137 and position it in hole (6). Operate on
vertical adjustment worm screw (2) after having loosen nuts (1), (2), (11) of
Fig.137 and (4) of Fig.136.
For adjustment from 0° to –30° extract nut (1) of Fig.137 and position it in
hole (3), extract nut (2) of Fig.137 and position it in hole (5). Operate on
vertical adjustment worm screw (2) after having loosen nuts (1), (2), (11) of
Fig.137 and (4) of Fig.136.

For vertical adjustment some markers, every 10°, are available on support.
The bigger marker gives 0° starting aiming position. Once the optimum aiming
position is obtained, tighten firmly the four nuts (1), (2), (11) of Fig.137 and
(4) and (5) of Fig.136 for vertical adjustment and the four nuts (7), (8), (9),
(10) of Fig.137 for horizontal adjustment. Tighten with 15 mm wrench and
32 Nm torque.

25.6 COMPATIBILITY

The pole installation kit of the ODU unit in 1+0 and 1+1 configuration is compatible with integrated antenna
complying with SIAE standard with measures 0.2 m, 0.4 m, 0.6 m, 0.8 m of diameter.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


191
25.7 GROUNDING

See Fig.138.

On ODU grounding can be connected with the available bolt spring washer and flat washers as shown.

192
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
A D D C

B C A B

Vertical polarization horizontal polarization

3 mm allen key 2
2,5 Nm torque

A
1
C

1 Antenna

2 Calibrated Allen screw

3 Centring ring

Fig.121 - Centring ring position

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


193
2

1 Steel belt
2 Plastic blocks

Fig.122 - Antislide strip

194
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
1

Antenna aiming direction


3

15 mm wrench
32 Nm torque 3

3 3

1 Pole fixing brackets

2 Tooth

3 Bolt

4 Pole support system

Fig.123 - Support mount on pole

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


195
Antenna aiming direction

1 Tooth

Fig.124 - Supporting system position

Fig.125 - Hole E

196
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
B C

A D

15 mm wrench
32 Nm torque

A, B, C, D Bolt slots

Fig.126 - Antenna installation on pole support

Vertical Horizontal

Fig.127 -Position of the ODU handle depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polari-
sation is always horizontal. Handle at the right side.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


197
1 13 mm wrench
6 Nm torque
H
H

H
H
1
1
H
H

H
H
1
H: Reference tooth

Fig.128 - Support system for ODU housing and reference tooth in evidence

198
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Reference tooth

O-ring
ODU side flange

"N"

"BNC"

Ground bolt

Fig.129 - ODU body reference tooth

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


199
5
30

Fig.130 - ODU housing final position for vertical polarization

5
30

5
30

Fig.131 - ODU housing final position for horizontal polarization

200
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
7

2
4
6

1 O–ring
2 Polarization twist disk

3 Hybrid mechanical body

4 Position marker of twist disk


5 Reference label for twist disk

6 O–ring

7 Allen screws

8 Spring washer

Fig.132 - Hybrid and polarization disk

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


201
Horizontal polarization

Vertical polarization

Fig.133 - Polarization disk fixing (only for 13GHz and 15 GHz)

202
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
1

RT1
2
1
RT2
13 mm wrench
18 Nm torque

1 Bolts

2 Spring washer

Fig.134 - Hybrid mount on pole support

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


203
AL version

AS version

Fig.135 - ODU housing final position for 1+1 version

204
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
3
4
5 1
2

1 Marker
2 Vertical adjustment

3 Horizontal adjustment

4 Bolt
5 Fixing nut

Fig.136 - Vertical and horizontal adjustments

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


205
15 mm wrench 15 mm wrench
32 Nm torque 32 Nm torque

7
4 11 1 8
3

10

9 15 mm wrench
6 32 Nm torque
5 2
15 mm wrench
32 Nm torque

1., 2., 3., 4. Horizontal aiming block bolts

5., 6., 7. Vertical aiming block bolts

8., 11. Threaded hole for vertical aiming up to –30°

9., 10. Threaded hole for vertical aimimg up to +30°

Fig.137 - Antenna aiming block

206
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
1
2
3

4
5
AL version

AS version

1 Bolt

2 Spring washer

3 Flat washer

4 Earth cable collar

5 Flat washer

Fig.138 - ODU grounding

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


207
26 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU
WITH INTEGRATED ANTENNA (KIT V32307,
V32308, V32309)

26.1 FOREWORD

The description concerns pole mounting of ODU, in 1+0 and 1+1 version, using following installation kits:

- V32307 for ODU with frequency from 10 to 13 GHz

- V32308 for ODU with frequency from 15 to 38 GHz

- V32309 for ODU with frequency from 7 to 8 GHz

Differences regard the dimensions and the presence of the centring ring (see Fig.139):

- V32307 centring ring for antenna flange from 10 to 13 GHz

- V32308 centring ring for antenna flange from 15 to 38 GHz

- V32309 no centring ring (and relevant screws).

26.2 INSTALLATION KIT

Following installation kits are supplied with the equipment depending on different versions.

1+0 version

• 60 to 129 mm pole mounting kit:

- centring ring and relevant screws

- pole support system plus antenna (already assembled) and pole fixing brackets

- 1+0 ODU support and relevant screws


- ODU with O–ring and devices for ground connection

1+1 version

• 60 to 129 mm pole mounting kit:

- centring ring and relevant screws

- pole support system plus antenna (already assembled) and pole fixing brackets
- 1+0 ODU support

- hybrid and relevant screws

- polarization twist disk and relevant screws

- 2 ODUs with O–rings and devices for ground connection.

208
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
26.3 REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED)

• N.1 2.5 mm Allen wrench

• N.1 3 mm Allen wrench

• N.1 6 mm Allen wrench


• N.1 13 mm spanner

• N.2 17 mm spanner.

Warning: if screwing operation concerns more than one screw or bolt, tighten subsequently everyone and
its opposite, step by step.

26.4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Installation procedure is listed below:

1+0 version

1 antenna polarization

2 installation of the centring ring on the antenna


3 installation of 1+0 ODU support

4 installation onto the pole of the assembled structure

5 installation of ODU

6 antenna aiming

7 ODU grounding

1+1 version

1 antenna polarization

2 installation of the centring ring on the antenna


3 installation of 1+0 ODU support

4 installation onto the pole of the assembled structure

5 installation of hybrid
6 installation of ODUs

7 antenna aiming

8 ODU grounding.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


209
26.5 1+0 MOUNTING PROCEDURES

26.5.1 Setting antenna polarization

Fig.139 – Set the antenna in such a position to operate on its rear side. Locate the four M3 Allen screws
around the antenna flange. Unscrew them (use 2.5 mm Allen wrench) and position the antenna flange ac-
cording on: horizontal wave guide –> vertical polarization, vertical wave guide –> horizontal polariza-
tion. Screw again the four Allen screws (torque = 1 Nm).

26.5.2 Installation of the centring ring on the antenna

Fig.139 – Set the antenna in such a position to operate on its rear side. Locate the three holes around the
antenna flange. Mount the centring ring onto antenna flange and tight it with the 3 Allen screws M4 (use
3mm Allen wrench, torque 2 = Nm).

26.5.3 Installation of 1+0 ODU support

Fig.139 – Mount the support onto assembled structure (pole support system plus antenna) using the four
M8 Allen screws (use 6 mm Allen wrench, torque 18 = Nm). Two of the four screws, diagonally opposed,
must be mounted with the two bushes around.

26.5.4 Installation onto the pole of the assembled structure

Fig.139 – Mount the assembled structure on the pole using the two pole fixing brackets and the four M10
screws (use 17 mm spanner, torque = 13 Nm); the heads of the screws are inserted on the antenna side,
the four nuts and the springs between nut and brackets are inserted on bracket side.

26.5.5 Installation of ODU (on 1+0 support)

Fig.140 – Apply silicon grease (e.g. RHODOSIL PATE 4”) on the O–ring by protecting fingers with gloves.

Fig.141 – Bring the ODU with the two hands and position the ODU handle at the bottom side. The handle
can assume the positions shown in the figure depending on the polarization. Position the ODU body near
the support and align the wave guide of the ODU to the Wave guide of the antenna: respect to the position
of wave guide alignment, turn the ODU body approx. 30° counter–clockwise into the support and search
for matching between reference tooth on the support (see Fig.142) and reference tooth on the ODU body.

Fig.143 – When alignment of the references teeth is achieved, turn the ODU body clockwise until rotation
is stopped. In figure are shown ODU final position for both polarizations.

Fig.142 – When ODU positioning is over, secure ODU body on the support by tightening bolts (use 13mm
spanner, torque = 6Nm).

210
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
26.5.6 Antenna aiming

Antenna aiming procedure for 1+0 version or 1+1 version is the same.

Horizontal aiming: ±5° operating on the 17 mm nut shown in Fig.144 with a 17 mm spanner, only after
having loosen the two 17 mm nut on the pivot.

Vertical aiming: ±20° operating on the 13 mm nut shown in Fig.144 with a 13 mm spanner, only after
having loosen the three 13 mm nut on the pole support.

Once optimum position is obtained, tighten firmly all the nuts previously loosen.

26.5.7 ODU grounding

ODU grounding is achieved with:

• M8 screw without washers

• M6 screw with washer

as shown in Fig.145.

26.6 1+1 MOUNTING PROCEDURES

In further page are explained all the mounting step not already discussed in paragraph “26.5 1+0 MOUNT-
ING PROCEDURES”.

26.6.1 Installation of Hybrid

Fig.146 – The polarization disk must be always fixed on hybrid flange. Apply silicon grease (e.g. RHODOSIL
PATE 4”) on the O–rings by protecting fingers with gloves. Bring the polarization twist disk with the position
marker down. Insert the O–ring into polarization twist disk.

Vertical polarization: fix the twist disk on hybrid flange placing the marker of the disk towards V mark.

Horizontal polarization: fix the twist disk on hybrid flange placing the marker of the disk towards H mark.

In 13 GHz and 15 GHz ODUs the polarization disk is fixed to the hybrid flange by means of 3 screws as
shown in Fig.147.

Tighten progressively and alternatively the screws and the spring washer with following torque:

Tab.60 - Torques for tightening screws

Frequencies Screw Tool Torque

from 18 to 38 GHz Allen screw M3 Allen key 2.5 mm 1 Nm

up to 15 GHz Allen screw M4 Allen key 3 mm 2 Nm

Fig.148 – Fix hybrid body to 1+0 support with four M8 bolts (use 13 mm spanner, torque = 18 Nm), tighten
progressively and alternatively the bolts.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


211
26.6.2 Installation of ODUs (on hybrid for 1+1 version)

For both ODUs.

Fig.140 – Apply silicon grease e.g. RHODOSIL PATE 4” to the O–ring by protecting fingers with gloves.

Fig.141 – Bring the ODU with the two hands and position the ODU handle at the bottom side. The handle
can assume the positions shown in the figure depending on the polarization. Position the ODU body near
the support and align the wave guide of the ODU to the wave guide of the hybrid: respect to the position
of wave guide alignment, turn the ODU body approx. 30° counter–clockwise and then insert the ODU body
into the support. For 1+1 system the handle of the ODU is always positioned on the right. The polarization
twist disk on the hybrid matches the antenna polarization.

Fig.149 – When alignment of the reference teeth is achieved, turn the ODU body clockwise until the rota-
tion stops. In figure are shown ODUs final position.

Fig.142 – When ODU positioning is over, secure ODU body on the support by tightening bolts (use 17 mm
spanner, torque = 6 Nm).

WARNING: Internal codes (e.g. installation items, antennas, PCB) are here reported only as example. The
Manufacturer reserves the right to change them without any previous advice.

Four 13mm
screws

Centring ring
(not present in V32309)

Three 3mm Allen screws Antenna


(not present in V32309)

1+0 support

Two bushes

Fig.139 - 1+0 pole mounting

212
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Reference tooth

O-ring
ODU wave guide

"N"

"BNC"

Ground bolt

Fig.140 - ODU body reference tooth

Vertical Horizontal

Fig.141 - Position of the ODU handle depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polar-
isation is always horizontal. Handle at the right side.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


213
3
1

1
5

4 4
1

2
3

1 6 mm Allen screw

2 Bush (diagonally placed)

3 17 mm Tightening bolts (max torque = 6 Nm)

4 Reference point for horizontal polarization

5 Reference point for vertical polarization

Fig.142 - 1+0 support

214
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
1+0 ODU HP with handle on the right:
horizontal polarization

1+0 ODU standard with handle on the left:


vertical polarization

Fig.143 - ODU housing final position for both polarization

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


215
Horizontal aiming:
two 17mm block screws

Vertical aiming:
13mm block screws
Pole support

17mm nut for horizontal


adjustment of antenna

Internal 5mm Allen


screw for vertical
adjustment of antenna

Fig.144 - Antenna aiming

216
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
1
2
3

4
5
AL version

AS version

1 Bolt

2 Spring washer

3 Flat washer

4 Earth cable collar

5 Flat washer

Fig.145 - ODU grounding

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


217
7

2
4
6

1 O–ring
2 Polarization twist disk

3 Hybrid mechanical body

4 Position marker of twist disk

5 Reference label for twist disk

6 O–ring

7 Allen screws

8 Spring washer

Fig.146 - Hybrid and twist disk

218
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Horizontal polarization

Vertical polarization

Fig.147 - Polarization disk fixing (only for 13 GHz and 15 GHz)

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


219
Fig.148 - Hybrid installation

220
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
AL version

AS version

Fig.149 - 1+1 ODUs installation

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


221
222
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
27 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU
WITH RFS INTEGRATED ANTENNA

27.1 FOREWORD

The installation onto the pole of the ODU with integrated antenna concerns both 1+0 and 1+1 version.

27.2 INSTALLATION KIT

Following installation kits are supplied with the equipment depending on different versions.

1+0 version

• 60 to 129 mm pole mounting kit:


- centring ring and relevant screws

- pole support system plus antenna (already assembled) and pole fixing brackets

- 1+0 ODU support and relevant screws


- ODU with O–ring and devices for ground connection

1+1 version

• 60 to 129 mm pole mounting kit:

- centring ring and relevant screws

- pole support system plus antenna (already assembled) and pole fixing brackets

- 1+0 ODU support

- hybrid and relevant screws

- polarization twist disk and relevant screws

- 2 ODUs with O–rings and devices for ground connection.

27.3 REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED)

• N.1 2.5 mm Allen wrench


• N.1 3 mm Allen wrench

• N.1 6 mm Allen wrench

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


223
• N.1 13 mm spanner

• N.2 17 mm spanner.

Warning: if screwing operation concerns more than one screw or bolt, tighten subsequently everyone and
its opposite, step by step.

27.4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Installation procedure is listed below:

1+0 version

1 antenna polarization

2 installation of the centring ring on the antenna

3 installation of 1+0 ODU support


4 installation onto the pole of the assembled structure

5 installation of ODU

6 antenna aiming

7 ODU grounding

1+1 version

1 antenna polarization

2 installation of the centring ring on the antenna

3 installation of 1+0 ODU support

4 installation onto the pole of the assembled structure

5 installation of hybrid

6 installation of ODUs
7 antenna aiming

8 ODU grounding.

27.5 1+0 MOUNTING PROCEDURES

27.5.1 Setting antenna polarization

Fig.139 – Set the antenna in such a position to operate on its rear side. Locate the four M3 Allen screws
around the antenna flange. Unscrew them (use 2.5 mm Allen wrench) and position the antenna flange ac-
cording on: horizontal wave guide –> vertical polarization, vertical wave guide –> horizontal polariza-
tion. Screw again the four Allen screws (torque = 1 Nm).

224
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
27.5.2 Installation of the centring ring on the antenna

Fig.139 – Set the antenna in such a position to operate on its rear side. Locate the three holes around the
antenna flange. Mount the centring ring onto antenna flange and tight it with the 3 Allen screws M4 (use
3mm Allen wrench, torque 2 = Nm).

27.5.3 Installation of 1+0 ODU support

Fig.139 – Mount the support onto assembled structure (pole support system plus antenna) using the four
M8 Allen screws (use 6 mm Allen wrench, torque 18 = Nm). Two of the four screws, diagonally opposed,
must be mounted with the two bushes around.

27.5.4 Installation onto the pole of the assembled structure

Fig.139 – Mount the assembled structure on the pole using the two pole fixing brackets and the four M10
screws (use 17 mm spanner, torque = 13 Nm); the heads of the screws are inserted on the antenna side,
the four nuts and the springs between nut and brackets are inserted on bracket side.

27.5.5 Installation of ODU (on 1+0 support)

Fig.140 – Apply silicon grease (e.g. RHODOSIL PATE 4”) on the O–ring by protecting fingers with gloves.

Fig.141 – Bring the ODU with the two hands and position the ODU handle at the bottom side. The handle
can assume the positions shown in the figure depending on the polarization. Position the ODU body near
the support and align the wave guide of the ODU to the Wave guide of the antenna: respect to the position
of wave guide alignment, turn the ODU body approx. 30° counter–clockwise into the support and search
for matching between reference tooth on the support (see Fig.142) and reference tooth on the ODU body.

Fig.143 – When alignment of the references teeth is achieved, turn the ODU body clockwise until rotation
is stopped. In figure are shown ODU final position for both polarizations.

Fig.142 – When ODU positioning is over, secure ODU body on the support by tightening bolts (use 13mm
spanner, torque = 6Nm).

27.5.6 Antenna aiming

Antenna aiming procedure for 1+0 version or 1+1 version is the same.
Horizontal aiming: ±5° operating on the 17 mm nut shown in Fig.144 with a 17 mm spanner, only after
having loosen the two 17 mm nut on the pivot.

Vertical aiming: ±20° operating on the 13 mm nut shown in Fig.144 with a 13 mm spanner, only after
having loosen the three 13 mm nut on the pole support.

Once optimum position is obtained, tighten firmly all the nuts previously loosen.

27.5.7 ODU grounding

ODU grounding is achieved with:

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


225
• M8 screw without washers

• M6 screw with washer

as shown in Fig.145.

27.6 1+1 MOUNTING PROCEDURES

In further page are explained all the mounting step not already discussed in paragraph “26.5 1+0 MOUNT-
ING PROCEDURES”.

27.6.1 Installation of Hybrid

Fig.146 – The polarization disk must be always fixed on hybrid flange. Apply silicon grease (e.g. RHODOSIL
PATE 4”) on the O–rings by protecting fingers with gloves. Bring the polarization twist disk with the position
marker down. Insert the O–ring into polarization twist disk.

Vertical polarization: fix the twist disk on hybrid flange placing the marker of the disk towards V mark.

Horizontal polarization: fix the twist disk on hybrid flange placing the marker of the disk towards H mark.

In 13 GHz and 15 GHz ODUs the polarization disk is fixed to the hybrid flange by means of 3 screws as
shown in Fig.147.

Tighten progressively and alternatively the screws and the spring washer with following torque:

Tab.61 - Torques for tightening screws

Frequencies Screw Tool Torque

from 18 to 38 GHz Allen screw M3 Allen key 2.5 mm 1 Nm

up to 15 GHz Allen screw M4 Allen key 3 mm 2 Nm

Fig.148 – Fix hybrid body to 1+0 support with four M8 bolts (use 13 mm spanner, torque = 18 Nm), tighten
progressively and alternatively the bolts.

27.6.2 Installation of ODUs (on hybrid for 1+1 version)

For both ODUs.

Fig.140 – Apply silicon grease e.g. RHODOSIL PATE 4” to the O–ring by protecting fingers with gloves.

Fig.141 – Bring the ODU with the two hands and position the ODU handle at the bottom side. The handle
can assume the positions shown in the figure depending on the polarization. Position the ODU body near
the support and align the wave guide of the ODU to the wave guide of the hybrid: respect to the position
of wave guide alignment, turn the ODU body approx. 30° counter–clockwise and then insert the ODU body
into the support. For 1+1 system the handle of the ODU is always positioned on the right. The polarization
twist disk on the hybrid matches the antenna polarization.
Fig.149 – When alignment of the reference teeth is achieved, turn the ODU body clockwise until the rota-
tion stops. In figure are shown ODUs final position.

Fig.142 – When ODU positioning is over, secure ODU body on the support by tightening bolts (use 17 mm
spanner, torque = 6 Nm).

226
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
WARNING: Internal codes (e.g. installation items, antennas, PCB) are here reported only as example. The
Manufacturer reserves the right to change them without any previous advice.

Three 3 mm
Centering ring Allen screws
Antenna Four 13mm screws

1+0 support

Fig.150 - 1+0 pole mounting

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


227
Reference tooth

O-ring
ODU wave guide

"N"

"BNC"

Ground bolt

Fig.151 - ODU body reference tooth

Vertical Horizontal

Fig.152 - Position of the ODU handle depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polar-
isation is always horizontal. Handle at the right side.

228
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
2
1

1
4

3 3
1

1 6 mm Allen screw M10

2 17 mm Tightening bolts (max torque = 6 Nm)

3 Reference point for horizontal polarization

4 Reference point for vertical polarization

Fig.153 - 1+0 support

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


229
1+0 ODU with handle on the left:
vertical polarization

1+0 ODU with handle on the right:


horizontal polarization

Fig.154 - ODU housing final position for both polarization

230
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Pole support

Vertical aiming
2

1
Horizontal aiming

Fig.155 - Antenna aiming

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


231
1
2
3

4
5
AL version

AS version

1 Bolt

2 Spring washer

3 Flat washer

4 Earth cable collar

5 Flat washer

Fig.156 - ODU grounding

232
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
7

2
4
6

1 O–ring
2 Polarization twist disk

3 Hybrid mechanical body

4 Position marker of twist disk

5 Reference label for twist disk

6 O–ring

7 Allen screws

8 Spring washer

Fig.157 - Hybrid and twist disk

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


233
Horizontal polarization

Vertical polarization

Fig.158 - Polarization disk fixing (only for 13 GHz and 15 GHz)

234
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Fig.159 - Hybrid installation

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


235
AS version

AL version

Fig.160 - 1+1 ODUs installation

236
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
28 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE 4 GHZ
ODU WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA (KIT V32323)

28.1 INSTALLATION KIT

1+0 version

• anti–sliding bracket

• ODU pole support and relevant screws

1+0 version

• anti–sliding bracket

• ODU pole support and relevant screws

• hybrid and relevant screws

• hybrid–ODU connecting cables

In case of flexible wave guide use, Tab.62 shows the maximum bending radius.

28.2 REQUIRED TOOLS FOR MOUNTING (NOT SUPPLIED)

• N.2 13 mm spanner

• N.1 15 mm spanner

• N.1 17 mm spanner.

Warning: if screwing operation concerns more than one screw or bolt, tighten subsequently everyone and
its opposite, step by step.

28.3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Installation procedure is listed below:

• 1+0/1+1 version: pole installation of the support

• 1+1 version: installation of the hybrid on the support

• installation of the ODU on the support

• ODU grounding and connection of the cables to the hybrid and antenna

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


237
1+0/1+1 version: pole installation of the support

Fig.161 – Install anti–sliding device (1) around the pole. The position of the plastic blocks depends on the
position of the support (2) and of the relevant hooking pin (3).

Hook the support to the plastic blocks by means of the hooking pin. Insert to the four screws (4) in the
relevant holes, set the two brackets (5) and clamp them around the pole tightening the four nuts (6) (tight-
ening torque = 32 Nm).

Cover the projecting bits of the screws using the relevant red covers (7).

The two holes (8) house the two tightening screws of the hybrid (only for 1+1 version).

1+1 version: hybrid installation on the support

Fig.162 – Set the hybrid (1) on the support (2) in such a way that the connectors are downward and that
the holes on the lower side of the hybrid match with the corresponding holes (8) of the Fig.161.

Insert the two screws (3) (tightening torque = 7.3 Nm) and tighten the hybrid to the support.

ODU installation on the support

Locate the part of the support more suitable for the installation of the ODU: both the parts can be used
(1+0 version).

Fig.162 – Locate the four slots (4) on the support (2).

Fig.163 – Keeping the knob of the ODU1 downward, partially screw the two screws (2) into the two upper
holes of the ODU, on N connector side.

Hook the heads of the two screws (2) of the Fig.163 into the slots (4) of the Fig.162.

Insert also the remaining screws (2) into the holes (3).

Tighten all the four screws (2) (tightening torque = 7.3 Nm).

Put the sun–cover (5) over the ODU (1) and fix it to the knob of the ODU by means of the supplied strip.

In case of 1+1 version, repeat the whole procedure for the second ODU.

ODU grounding and connection of the cables to hybrid and antenna

Fig.164 – Tighten the grounding cable of each ODU by means of grounding bolt (1) (tightening torque =
7.3 Nm) and the relevant washer. For the connection of the RF cable follow the label on the bottom of the
hybrid: ODU1 (RT1) is that connected to RIM1 of IDU, ODU 2 (RT2) is that connected to RIM2 of IDU.

238
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Tab.62 - Waveguide bending radius according to frequency

Bending radius Bending radius Bending radius Bending radius


without rebending without rebending with rebending with rebending
Frequency
mm (inch) mm (inch) mm (inch) mm (inch)
E-plane a H-plane b E-plane a. H-plane b.

6 GHz or 7 GHz
200 (7,9) 500 (19,8) 300 (11,9) 600 (23,7)
low

7 GHz high 200 (7,9) 500 (19,8) 250 (9,9) 600 (23,7)

11 GHz 130 (5,1) 280 (11,0) 150 (5,9) 300 (11,9)

13 GHz 130 (5,1) 280 (11,0) 150 (5,9) 300 (11,9)

15 GHz 130 (5,1) 280 (11,0) 150 (5,9) 300 (11,9)

18 GHz 130 (5,1) 280 (11,0) 150 (5,9) 300 (11,9)

23 GHz 110 (4,3) 230 (9,1) 130 (5,1) 250 (9,9)

38 GHz 80 (3,1) 140 (5,5) 90 (3,6) 150 (5,9)

a. Bending E-plane

Rmin/E
Bending E-plane
(short side of the section)

b. Bending H-plane

Rmin/H
Bending H-plane
(long side of the section)

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


239
7

7
6
1
3
4
5

8
4

Fig.161 - Pole installation of the support

240
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
4

Fig.162 - Installation of the hybrid on the pole support (only for 1+1 version)

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


241
5

1
3 2

Fig.163 - Installation of the ODU on the support

242
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
RT2

RT1

Fig.164 - ODU grounding and connection of the cables to hybrid and antenna

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


243
244
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Section 4.
LINE-UP

29 LINE–UP OF THE RADIO HOP

29.1 LINE–UP OF THE RADIO HOP

The line–up consists of the following steps:


• on site radio terminal installation (user connections and ODU installation as described in the rele-
vant chapters)

• equipment switch–on

• equipment configuration (through PC software)

• antenna alignment for maximum received RF signal level

• network element configuration

• check measurements.

Equipment installation is described in Section 3. INSTALLATION.

29.1.1 Equipment configuration

In order to have the link working properly, in the local and remote equipment the same parameters have
to be set:

• system layout (1+0, 1+1 hot stand-by, 1+1 frequency diversity.....) (Equipment - General)

• capacity (Equipment - General)

• modulation (Equipment - General)

• link ID (Equipment - General)

• RF channel (Radio - Radio Branch)

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


245
The software to run is relevant to the equipment to configure:

• LCT in case of AL, ALC AL Plus

• WEB LCT in case of ALC Plus.

Traffic (Baseband - Tributary)

Used tributaries must be enabled on local and on remote equipment.

Service channels (Service Channels)

Service channels setting must be the same on local and on remote equipment: different settings of not
used service channels, between local and remote equipments, cut the operation of those service channels
properly set also.

In the following chapters, all the configuration steps are explained using LCT that differs from WEB LCT in
graphical layout only.

29.1.2 Antenna alignment and received field measurement

Purpose of antenna alignment is to maximize the RF received signal level.

Proceed as follows:

• connect a multimeter to BNC connector on the ODU for AGC measurement

• adjust antenna pointing as soon as the maximum AGC voltage value is achieved.

The relationship between AGC voltage and received field is shown by Fig.165.

The received field level has a tolerance of ±4 dB in the full temperature range.

29.1.3 Network element configuration

A factory default address is assigned to each network element that must normally be reconfigurated on
site following the network administrator rules.

To the purpose it is required to connect the PC, where the SCT/LCT program has been installed, to the
network interfaces.

This has to be done via serial cable or Ethernet cable.

Warning: the checks that follow require a good knowledge of the program use.

The description of each menu and relevant windows are given by the program itself as help on line.

Run the program and perform the connection to equipment by choosing from menu “Option” the connec-
tion made via serial cable.

Perform the login to the equipment by entering:

• Equipment IP address 3

• User ID (default: SYSTEM)


• Password: (default: siaemicr)

Proceed to program what above mentioned following this path:

3 If the connection is made via serial cable, the IP address is automatically achieved.

246
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
• IP Address: select menu “Equipment” from the menu bar and then Communication Setup–>Port
Configuration. Enter the required port addresses in the available communication ports. Press ? for
details.

• Routing Table and Default Gateway: select menu “Equipment” from the menu bar and then Com-
munication Setup–>Routing table: enter the routes or default gateway if necessary. Press ? for de-
tails.

Warning: the routing policy depends on the routing type: manual IP/OSPF/IS–IS. The relevant
routing rules must be normally given by network administrator.

• Remote Element Table: select menu “Tools” from menu bar and then Subnetwork Configuration
Wizard. Station name and remote element table must be assigned following description of the con-
textual help on–line (?).

• Agent IP Address: select menu “Equipment” and then “Properties”. Assign the address in accord-
ance to the address of the remote element you want to reach.

29.1.4 Radio checks

It is advisable to perform the following measurements to check the correct operation of the radio hop:
• transmitted power

• received power

• RF frequency
• BER measurement

All these checks make use of the SCT/LCT program.

• Transmitted power, received RF level, RF frequency


- run SCT/LCT program and then perform the connection to the equipment you want to check.

- make double click on the select equipment until main RADIO PDH–AL window is shown.

- on top of the window Tx/Rx power and frequency values are displayed. In case of Tx power and
frequency setup proceed to Branch 1/2 and Power/Frequencies submenus.

• BER measurement

- Run SCT/LCT program and then perform the connection to the equipment you want to check.

- Make double click on the selected equipment until main RADIO PDH–AL window is shown.

- On the left side select BER1/2 measure.


In alternative it is possible to use the PRBS function if one or 2 Mbit/s line is free.
- Perform the BER measurement and check that values comply with the requirements.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


247
V

2,625

2,25

1,875

1,5

1,125

0,75

0 dBm

-100 -80 -70 -60 -50 -40 -30 -20

Fig.165 - Detected voltage versus RF received signal

248
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
30 LINE–UP OF LIM ETHERNET/2 MBIT/S

30.1 GENERAL

This paragraph deals with line–up of LIM Ethernet module with details of SCT/LCT program related only to
Ethernet application.

Assuming that the radio link is already in service, with correct frequency, output power and correct antenna
alignment, the line up procedure for two different kinds of connection set up of a radio link AL, equipped
with LIM Ethernet/2 Mbit/s module, is hereafter described:

1 Local Lan–1 port to remote Lan–1 port connection Lam per port, see Fig.166

2 Local Lan–1 port to remote Lan–1 port connection with only VLANs

3 3 to 1 port connections, see Fig.179.

Settings here below are intended to be done both into local and remote radio equipment.

The software to be used depends on the equipment you have to configure.

• LCT for AL, ALC, AL Plus


• WEB LCT for ALC Plus.

In the following chapters all configuration steps are shown using LCT. LCT and WEB LCT only differs in
graphical interface.

30.2 LOCAL LAN–1 PORT TO REMOTE LAN–1 PORT TRANSPARENT


CONNECTION LAN PER PORT

Settings for Untagged and Tagged Traffic

switch switch

Lan-1 port 1 port 1 Lan-1

Lan-2 AL AL Lan-2
radio radio
Lan-3 Lan-3

Nx2 Nx2
Mbit/s Mbit/s
Local Remote

Fig.166 - Local Lan–1 port to remote Lan–1 port connection

The line–up of AL with LIM Ethernet is made with the help of SCT/LCT program.

Please refer to Fig.167. First selection is Ethernet throughput and modulation scheme, in this example we
select 16 Mbit/s and modulation 16QAM (max throughput and modulation scheme depend on terms of li-
cence provided by Siae Microelettronica).

Select configuration 1+0 or 1+1 according system requirements. Inside LCT, select Tributary window (see
Fig.168). If 2 Mbit/s tributaries are needed, inside the Tributary window it is possible to activate a 2 Mbit/

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


249
s input/output on the front panel. When the activation of required 2 Mbit/s tributaries is completed, all the
others 2 Mbit/s streams are automatically used for the Ethernet traffic. For instance with a 8x2 Mbit/s ca-
pacity if we use two 2 Mbit/s the capacity assigned to Ethernet circuits is automatically set to 6x2 = 12
Mbit/s full duplex.

Fig.167 - Selection of Ethernet Throughput

250
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Fig.168 - Tributary enable
See Fig.169 for General settings for the switch. All the used ports must be Enabled, so enable Lan–1 and
Internal Port, see Fig.170.

The other ports should be disabled. The correct cable crossover arrangement must be selected too (see
Fig.170). Enable LLF if needed only at the end of link line up.

For Untagged traffic, connections are done with Lan per port selections. Referring to Fig.171 incoming traf-
fic at Lan–1 exits at Internal Port and into Fig.173 incoming traffic at Internal Port exits at lan–1 port. This
connection are done for all Untagged traffic and all Tagged packets with Vlan Id not described into Vlan
Configuration Table.

If Vlan Configuration Table is blank all Tagged traffic follows the rules of Lan per port.

Possible selections of Ingress Filtering Check:


1 “Disable 802.1q”: no check of Virtual Lan tag is made and all packets follow Lan per port settings

2 “Fallback”: if Tagged packets have their Vlan Id into Vlan Configuration Table they follow the con-
nection described into the table, otherwise they follow the Lan per port settings as Untagged pack-
ets

3 “Secure”: no Untagged packet transits; only Tagged packets with Vlan Id listed into the table can
transit. For all pass configuration “Disable 802.1” should be selected. With Egress Mode as Unmodi-
fied the outgoing packets at Lan–1 port exit Untagged or Tagged exactly as they were Untagged or
Tagged at the incoming port.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


251
Link Loss
Forwarding
Histeresys

Output policy
for Tagged
packets: Level
2 priority, if
used, defined
for all the ports
for incoming
packets
already Tagged

Click here for Port mapping and


VLAN configuration table

Fig.169 - Switch general settings

Fig.170 - Lan–1 interface settings

252
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Fig.171 - Vlan settings for Lan–1

Invoming
Untagged
packets at
Lan-1 are sent
into output part
queue following
this selection.
In this example
packets are
inserted into
queue 0

Fig.172 - Priority setting for Lan–1 and Internal Port

With Priority disabled no check is done into 802.1p priority Tag. All types of packets go into Default Priority
Queue.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


253
Fig.173 - Vlan settings for Internal Port

Fig.174 - Vlan Configuration Table

30.3 LOCAL LAN–1 PORT TO REMOTE LAN–1 PORT TRANSPARENT


CONNECTION LAN PER PORT

Settings are done to transfer only Tagged traffic within some Vlans.

We want that Vlan 701, 702, 710 and 1, 2, 3 can pass into the radio link and all the other Tagged or Un-
tagged packets should be blocked.

254
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
The line up of AL with LIM Ethernet is made with the help of LCT/SCT program. Please refer to Fig.166.
First selection is Ethernet throughput and modulation scheme, in this example we select 16 Mbit/s and
modulation 16QAM (max throughput and modulation scheme depends on terms of licence provided by Siae
Microelettronica). Select configuration 1+0 or 1+1 according system requirements.
Inside LCT, select tributary window (see Fig.167). If 2 Mbit/s tributaries are needed, inside the tributary
window it is possible to activate a 2 Mbit/s input/output on the front panel. When the activation of required
2 Mbit/s tributaries is completed, all the others 2 Mbit/s streams are automatically used for the Ethernet
traffic. for instance with a 16 Mbit/s capacity if we use two 2 Mbit/s the capacity assigned to ethernet cir-
cuits is automatically set to 16–2x2 = 12 Mbit/s full duplex.

See Fig.168 for general settings for the switch. All the used ports must be enabled, so enable Lan–1 and
Internal Port, see Fig.169. The other port should be disabled. The correct Cable crossover arrangement
must be selected too. Enable LLF if needed only at the end of link line up.

Vlan settings for Lan–1 and Internal Port should be like in Fig.175 with Ingress Filtering Check as “Secure”
and Engress Mode as “Tagged”. With this setting only Tagged packets with Vlan ID listed into the Vlan Con-
figuration Table can transit. All Untagged packets are blocked at the incoming port and outgoing Tagged
packets don’t change.

A packet with Vlan ID XX can enter into the switch only if Incoming Port (Ingress port) is a member of the
Vlan XX, same packet will exit only from ports (Engress Port) which are members of Vlan XX. Vlan mem-
bership is described into Vlan Configuration Table. A port can be member of no one, one or more Vlans.
See Fig.176 for Vlan Configuration Table settings for our example.

Fig.175 - Virtual Lan input and output settings at Lan–1 port

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


255
Fig.176 - Vlan Configuration Table with some Vlans

Tagged incoming packet can be treated with FIFO policy or on the basis of their 802.1p priority tag and
ToS/DSCP value for IP packets. There are 4 queue at each output port. The decision about to which output
queue to send a packet is defined into Ethernet switch window selections for 802.1p tag. Into Ethernet
switch window it is possible to select ToS/DSCP button to open window ToS/DSCP, in this window each
incoming ToS/DSCP value is associated with an output queue so it is possible to change the priority of the
incoming packet.

When no info on priority is available, the packet is sent to Default Priority Queue using FIFO policy.
Into Lan–1 window select Priority (802.1q), into priority box there are some selections: with “Disable”
switch doesn’t look at priority tag; with “802.1p” switch looks at Tag 802.1p only; with “IpToS” for IP pack-
ets only switch looks to ToS/DSCP identifier (into IP frame) only; with “802.1p – IpToS” switch looks first
to 802.1p tag and secondly to ToS/DSCP, see Fig.178; with “IpToS–802.1p” switch looks first to ToS/DSCP
and secondly to Tag 802.1p.

Note: with IpToS switch looks to IP packet and ToS/DSCP doesn’t matter if the packets are tagged with
802.1p or not.

In this example incoming tagged are tagged and it is necessary to transfer the packets with no change so
they must exit from output ports tagged, see Fig.176 and Fig.177.

Fig.177 - Add a new Vlan ID to Vlan Configuration Table with output tagged

256
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Incoming
Untagged
packets at
Lan-1 are sent
into output part
queue following
this selection.
In this example
packets are
inserted into
queue 0.

Fig.178 - Layer 2 and Layer 3 priority management

30.4 3 TO 1 PORT CONNECTIONS

switch switch

Lan-1 port 1 port 1 Lan-1

Lan-2 AL AL Lan-2
radio radio
Lan-3 Lan-3

Nx2 Nx2
Mbit/s Mbit/s
Local Remote

Fig.179 - 3 to 1 port connections


In this example 3 local port must communicate with corresponding remote ports. All the ports share the
same radio channel but traffic originated and directed to Lan1 should be kept separated from traffic from
Lan2 and Lan3 and viceversa.
Lan–1 to Lan–1 connection should transfer tagged packets with Vlan 1, 701, 760 and untagged packets.
Unspecified tagged packets must be stopped. Lan–2 and Lan–3 have the same requirements. For all con-
nections IP packets with high priority TOS should transferred at minimum delay.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


257
30.5 3 TO 1 PORT CONNECTIONS, SETTINGS FOR UNTAGGED TRAF-
FIC

The line–up of AL with LIM Ethernet is made with the help of LCT/SCT. Please refer to Fig.166.

First selection is Ethernet throughput and modulation scheme, in this example we select 16 Mbit/s and
modulation 16QAM (max throughput and modulation scheme depend on terms of licence provided by Siae
Microelettronica). Select configuration 1+0 or 1+1 according system requirements.

Inside LCT, select Tributary window (see Fig.167).

If 2 Mbit/s tributaries are needed, inside the tributary window it is possible to activate a 2 Mbit/s input/
output on the front panel. When the activation of required 2 Mbit/s tributaries is completed, all the others
2 Mbit/s streams are automatically used for the Ethernet traffic. For instance with a 8x2 Mbit/s capacity if
we use two 2 Mbit/s the capacity assigned to Ethernet circuits is automatically set to 6x2 = 12 Mbit/s full
duplex.

Vlan Configuration Table will be defined in order to group traffic from Lan–1, Lan–2, Lan–3 to Port1. All the
used ports must be Enabled.
Untagged traffic transits only if the selection for Ingress Filtering Check is disabled at each input port and
a separated Vlan for Untagged traffic is set up for each port. See Fig.168, Fig.169, Fig.178, Fig.179,
Fig.180.

Each port of the switch must be associated with a different Default VLAN ID in order to maintain the traffic
coming from different separated LANs, Lan–1 with default VID 3301, Lan–2 with default VID 3302, Lan–3
with default VID 3303, for Lan–1 see Fig.180, Fig.181 and Fig.183.

The correct Cable Crossover arrangement must be selected too.

Fig.180 - Input and output setting for VLANs at Lan–1 port

258
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Fig.181 - Output port properties for VLAN 3301

Vlan 3301, 3302, 3303 are allowed to exit at Port1


with tags (Tagged). Different default Tag’s allow to
keep separate the traffic from Lan1, Lan2 and
Lan3 exiting at Port 1. At the remote end the traffic
is split and forwarded from Port1 to Lan1, Lan 2
and Lan3 without Tag to preserve the original
format.

Default VID assigned by


user to each port

Fig.182 - Typology 3 to 1, Virtual Lan Configuration


With the above settings inside the VLAN configuration Table only Untagged traffic is forwarded accross the
bridge.

The same settings should be done inside the remote equipment. The above example shows the Virtual Lan
Configuration Table in case of a link carrying the traffic of 3 independent LAN’s connected to Lan–1, Lan–
2, Lan–3, which is split at the remote end among the outgoing Lan–1, Lan–2, Lan–3 ports, while using a
common radio link.

To prioritize some IP packets with high ToS/DSCP value it is possible to open PToS/DSCP window from Eth-
ernet switch window and select the values of ToS for which the packet is sent to high priority Queue, see
Fig.183.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


259
TOS value description DSCP value description

Packets
with AF43
priority
level will
go into
Queue 3 at
all ports

AF43 now goes to Queue 3, with this


button AF43 will go to Queue 2

Fig.183 - Output Queue selection on the basis of TOS/DSCP priority

30.6 3 TO 1 PORT CONNECTIONS, SETTINGS FOR TAGGED AND UN-


TAGGED TRAFFIC

If we want VLAN with Tag 701, 702 and 703 to transit between Lan–1 and Port–1 it is necessary to define
Port 1 and Lan 1 as members of VLAN1, 701, 760 (see Fig.184 for VLAN 701 and do the same for VLAN1,
760).

The VLAN Configuration Table will look like Fig.185.

For Lan–2 and Lan–3 we cannot use the same Vlan if we want to maintain traffic from Lan 1, 2, 3 separated.
We must change the number of incoming Vlan for instance of 1, 701, 760 use 2001, 2701, 2760 for Lan–
2 and 3001, 3701, 3760 for Lan–3. Connected equipment to Lan–2 port should be reprogrammed to use
Vlan 2001, 2701, 2760.

Connected equipment to Lan–3 port should be reprogrammed to use Vlan 3001, 3701, 3760.

To prioritize Ip packets with high ToS/DSCP value it is possible to open PToS/DSCP window from Ethernet
switch window and select the values of ToS for which the packet is sent to high priority Queue 3, see
Fig.181. The same should be done inside the remote equipment.

260
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Fig.184 - Output properties of VLAN 701

Fig.185 - Typology 3 to 1, Virtual Lan Configuration Table with Vlan

30.7 3 TO 1 CONNECTIONS: EXAMPLES OF PRIORITY MANAGEMENT

Example 1: To assign to Lan–1 and Lan–3 low priority and to Lan–2 high priority, while wanting Tagged
and Untagged to be treated in a fair manner on each queue do as follow: select Priority Disable for Lan–1,
Lan–2 and Lan–3; select Default Priority Queue equal to Queue 0 for lan–1 and Lan–3 (see Fig.172). Select
Default Priority Queue equal to Queue 3 for Lan–2 (as in Fig.186).

Outgoing Untagged packets will take priority tag defined into input port, in this case 0. Tagged frames keep
their tag.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


261
Example 2: Wanting tagged frames to be treated according their actual priority and untagged packets with
low priority, all inputs should be configured as in Fig.187.

Layer 2 Priority assignment is not modified if inside the second folder of the Lan–X (1, 2, 3) configuration
window Untagged Frame Egress Mode = Unmodified is selected as in Fig.188.

Untagged packet arriving to Lan-2 are sent to output port Queues setting of this
folder. In this example all incoming packets at LAN-2 are inserted into output
Queue 3 of output ports.
Input priority: when Disable is not selected, Tagged frame are sent to queue
0,1,2,3 to port destination priority value; when Disabled is selected for this port
switch uses the Default Priority Queue for Tagged and Untagged frames, and
without really changing Tag into Incoming Tagged frames.

Fig.186 - Queue selection

262
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Fig.187 - Management of tagged frames according with their priority tag

Fig.188 - Incoming packets at Lan–1 will exit to other ports unchanged according their incom-
ing status.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


263
31 LINE–UP OF LIM FOR EAST/WEST REPEATER
WITH DROP/INSERT

31.1 GENERAL

This paragraph deals with line–up of LIM for east/west repeater with details of SCT/LCT program related
only to cross connection facilities offered by internal cross connection matrix.

Assuming that the radio link is already in service, the following items are described:

• baseband configuration

• east or west configuration

• east or west presetting

• tributary enabling

• one direction tributary connection

• protected tributary connection (drop/insert)

• protection setting (Rx tributary switch).

• pass through E1 connection

The 2 Mbit/s streams connected to front panel of cross connection unit are called Tributaries while the 2
Mbit/s streams connected to matrix east side or west side are called E1.

31.2 BASEBAND CONFIGURATION

Operations4 to enable the facilities offered by internal cross connection matrix are the following:

• inside LCT, open Equipment General window as in Fig.189.

• in Baseband Configuration field, select E–W 16x2.

4 Each command has to be applied and confirmed (push Apply button and Confirm button)

264
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Fig.189 - Baseband configuration

31.3 EAST/WEST CONFIGURATION

Operations to configure the radio link toward one direction are the following:

• inside LCT, open Equipment General East (or West) window as in Fig.190

• select proper parameters in Capacity&Modulation Scheme field and right Link ID in Local Link ID
field (0 means “not used”).

Configuration of one direction can be different respect the other: if different capacities are selected,
number of pass–through connection depend on this.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


265
Fig.190 - Configuration of radio branch of one direction

31.4 EAST OR WEST PRESETTING

In case of bad quality of Rx signal from one direction, HBER on east or west branch, some features can be
enabled: inside LCT as in Fig.191, open Equipment, open Gen. Preset East (or West) and:

• in order to insert AIS in case of HBER: select Enable in Hber –> Rx Ais Ins Rx Sw field

• in order to insert AIS in case of hardware failure in Rx: select Enable in Ais Rx Insertion field

• in order to cut the signal of service channels in case of HBER: select Enable in Service Squelch field

266
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Fig.191 - Presetting of radio branch of one direction

31.5 TRIBUTARY ENABLING

In order to enable/disable the tributaries connected to the cross–connection unit, inside LCT as in Fig.192,
open Base Band, open Tributary and click on central square of each tributary:

• central line open: the tributary is disabled

• central line closed: the tributary is enabled.

If the rectangle with a little black triangle is clicked, four alarms relevant the tributary appear: AIS, BER
(BER = 10–6), OOF (Out Of Frame), OOMF (Out of MultiFrame).

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


267
Fig.192 - Tributary enabling window

31.6 ONE DIRECTION TRIBUTARY CONNECTION

The procedure to enable one tributary connection towards one direction is the following: inside LCT as in
Fig.193 open Cross Connection, select Configuration and drag and drop the slot of the tributary on the
slot relevant the desired E1.

Fig.193 - Cross connection window in a link with East and West sides configured as 4x2 Mbit/s

268
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
31.7 PROTECTED TRIBUTARY CONNECTION

A protected tributary connection is a tributary connection towards both direction where one direction is a
protection for the other (a sort of Drop/Insert in a PDH ring).

Procedure: inside LCT as in Fig.194 open Cross Connection, select Configuration and drag and drop the
slot relevant the tributary “z“ on the slot relevant the desired E1 “x” first in one direction and after for the
other on the slot relevant the desired E1 “y”. Position of involved E1 can be different (for example: x ≠ y ≠
z).

Fig.194 - Protected tributary connection (Drop/Insert in a PDH ring) in a link with East and
West configured as 16x2 Mbit/s

31.8 PROTECTION SETTING (Rx E1 SWITCH)

In a protected tributary connection one direction can be the preferential in Rx E1 switch or can be selected
manually. Protection policy setting: inside LCT as in Fig.195, open Cross Connection, select Configura-
tion and double click the tributary slot whose protection policy we want to set.

Preferential switch:

• Auto – One of the two E1 is selected in Rx. In case of E1 alarmed, the switch selects the one without
alarms
• E1 East – E1 east is selected in Rx if both E1 are without alarms

• E1 West – E1 west is selected in Rx if both E1 are without alarms

Forced switch:

• Auto – One of the two E1 is selected in Rx. In case of E1 alarmed, the switch selects the one without
alarms

• E1 East – E1 east is selected

• E1 West – E1 west is selected.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


269
Fig.195 - Protection policy of a tributary stream

31.9 PASS–THROUGH E1 CONNECTION

A pass–through E1 connection is a connection between one East E1 stream and one West E1 stream.

How to set a Pass–through E1 connection: inside LCT as in Fig.196, open Cross Connection, select Con-
figuration and drag and drop the slot relevant the East E1 on the slot relevant the West E1. East and West
E1 can be different.

Fig.196 - East/West Pass–through connection in a link with East and West configured as 16x2
Mbit/s

270
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
32 LINE-UP OF THE LINK WITH NODAL IDU

32.1 OVERVIEW

The following paragraph deals with the activation of the NODAL IDU unit with details of the SCT/LCT pro-
gram relevant to the functionalities offered by the cross-connection matrix in relation to the achievable
connections.

Supposing that the radio links are already commissioned, the following items are described:

• Tributaries on line side and tributaries on radio side

• Tributaries on line side and other tributaries on line side (protected and unprotected buses included)

• Tributaries on radio side and other tributaries on radio side

32.2 EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION

The operations to enable the functionalities offered by the internal cross-connection matrix are the follow-
ing:

1 run the software LCT, open Equipment, Configurator as in Fig.197

2 configure the IDU as 2U, Drop Insert, Matrix (with relevant tributaries)

3 configure the radio links: Radio A (1A and 2A, with 2x(1+0)) and Radio B (1B and 2B, with 2x(1+0))

4 configure the LIM: Processor

5 define the IDU you are configuring: No Nodal (single nodal IDU), Node A, Node B, Node C

6 configure the node type: 2 Elems, 3 Elems

7 configure the type of BUS connecting the IDUs: No Protec. (NBUS 1 and 2 -> transport of 126 E1
each), Protec. (single NBUS-> transport of 126 E1)

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


271
Fig.197 - Configurator

32.3 TRIBUTARY CONFIGURATION

The operations to enable the tributaries involved in the cross-connections with the matrix are:

• run the software LCT, open BaseBand, Tributaries and select the type of used tributary
• enable the E1 and/or STM-1 tributaries (transport of 63 E1 each) involved by the cross-connection.
To route an E1 stream to remote equipment, a Tributary - Radio cross-connection must be created,
the enabling of the stream itself is not sufficient.
• in case of STM-1 streams, configure the parameters VC4 and VC12 and the synchronization param-
eters (LCT, Synchronisation)

32.4 Configuration of the Cross-connection matrix

The operations to configure a cross-connection are:

• run the software LCT, open Cross Connection, Matrix and press Configuration

• select the type of cross-connection:


- Tributary - Radio : Cross-connection between the tributaries available on the front side of the
Matrix module (E1, STM-1, NBUS or NBUS1 and 2) and the tributaries available on the radio
Link, 1A, 2A, 1B or 2B (it depends on the capacity set on the radio Link)

272
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
- Tributary - Tributary : Cross-connection between the tributaries available on the front side of
the Matrix module (E1, STM-1, NBUS or NBUS1 and 2)

32.4.1 Tributary - Radio Cross-connection

The operations to create and configure this cross-connection are:

• select the type of tributary to use on the front side of the Matrix module: the relevant E1 streams
will be displayed in the window together with the number of E1 streams relevant to the radio Link

• select which radio Link you wish to use in the cross-connection (up to four available)

• move the symbol of the E1 stream (the number corresponds to the physical position in the connec-
tor of the Matrix module) by dragging and dropping from a type of tributary to the position to use
in the radio frame, see Fig.198.

• the first create cross-connection is the main (colour blue); a second one regarding the same E1 trib-
utary can be created to the radio Link B with the same modality. The second cross-connection will
be the reserve (colour pink) of the first one. The parameters, and the possible alarms, ruling the
switch between the two radio directions can be configured in the window which can be opened by
a double click on the box relevant to the E1 tributary on matrix side, see Fig.199

• the tributaries in the radio frame (Link direction A or others) can be involved in a tributary loop
towards the corresponding remote radio by means of a double click on the relevant box that points
out the position in the frame, see Fig.200

• the tributaries on radio side can transit directly from a radio link to the other without need to pass
from the tributaries on matrix side: by means of drag'n'drop, a box relevant to an E1 on radio side
is moved from a Link to the other Link. The two involved Links must be selected in the fields 1st
Radio and 2nd Radio. A pass-through (transit) cross-connection is so executed: see Fig.201

• to delete a cross-connection, move it to the trash

• to activate the configuration, press Apply and Confirm.

Fig.198 - Radio/Tributary

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


273
Fig.199 - Switch parameters of the cross-connections

Fig.200 - Tributary loop on radio side

274
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Fig.201 - Radio/radio cross-connection

32.4.2 Tributary - Tributary Cross-connection

The operations to create and configure this cross-connection are:

1 select the two types of tributary (1st Tributary and 2nd Tributary) on the front side of the Matrix
module to use as ends: the relevant E1 streams will be displayed in the top and bottom part of the
window

2 move the symbol of the E1 stream (the number corresponds to the physical position in the connec-
tor on the Matrix module) by means of the drag'n'drop from a tributary type to another, see Fig.202.

3 to delete a cross-connection, move to the trash

4 to activate the configuration, press Apply and Confirm.

This type of cross-connection includes even those relevant to the transport of E1 streams from a nodal IDU
to another one belonging to the same node.

Remember that, in case of protected NBUS connections, there is not distinction between NBUS1 and 2,
while the single generic NBUS connection will be displayed.

The configuration of the transport of E1 streams from a nodal IDU to another one belonging to the same
node must be executed on both the involved nodal IDUs.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


275
Fig.202 - Tributary/Tributary Cross-connection

276
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
33 HOW TO CHANGE ADDRESS ON REMOTE EQUIP-
MENT WITHOUT LOSING THE CONNECTION

33.1 PROCEDURE

1 Set new addresses on remote equipment

2 Clear the Stored Routing Table on remote equipment and add new lines to it

3 Set the new Agent and restart remote equipment


4 Configure Local equipment

5 Prepare Subnetwork on local equipment, capture the remote equipment and send it the new sub-
netork

Select the remote equipment

Select menu Equipment -> Configuration Setup -> Port Configuration

Fig.203 - Subnetwork Craft Terminal - Communication setup

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


277
Configuration

Configure:

IP Ethernet ->Ip address and netmask (see Fig.204)

Lct PPP -> Ip address and netmask (see Fig.205)

PPP Radio -> Ip address and netmask (see Fig.206)

If you have other port to configure ex. PPP RS232 - 2Mbit/s EOC ecc. configure it with IP and netmask

Fig.204 - IP Ethernet

278
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Fig.205 - LCT PPP

Fig.206 - PPP Radio

At the end select Set Values -> Confirm and Store -> Confirm.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


279
Select the equipment

Select menu Equipment -> Configuration Setup -> Stored Routing Table

Fig.207 - Store Routing Table

In this menu delete all lines and default gateway, push Apply and then Save.

280
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Fig.208 - Stored Routing Table

Add new routine lines (relevant the new addresses configuration) pushing the Add button.
When the Stored Routing Table is complete, push Apply and then Save.

Select the remote equipment

Select menu Equipment -> Properties. Set new Agent (equal to Ethernet port address).
Push Restart and then Confirm.

After the restart, the Remote Equipment disappears from SCT display.

Configure the local equipment

Configure the local equipment with the same procedure seen before. Then restart the local equipment.

Subnetwork Configuration Wizard

To see both local and remote equipments the new subnetwork (station and equipments) must be prepared.

Select menu Tools -> Subnetwork Configuration Wizard.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


281
Fig.209 - Subnetwork Configuration Wizard

282
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Fig.210 - Subnetwork Configuration Wizard - Actual Configuration

Push Add Station, write its name and push OK.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


283
Fig.211 - Add new station

Select this new station and push Add Element.

The Ip Address to set is the Agent (equal to Ethernet port address).

284
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Fig.212 - Add New Network Element

After having set the Equipment Address, push OK.

The new element is created inside the previously created station

This step must be done for local and remote equipment.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


285
Fig.213 - Subnetwork Configuration Wizard
Select the local equipment (the one with System (Local) )

286
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Fig.214 - Subnetwork Configuration Wizard

Send the configuration to local equipment.


When the remote equipment appears in Actual Configuration, prepare again the network configuration you
have set before (or select the local equipment, push Retrieve) and send the configuration to remote equip-
ment.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


287
288
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Section 5.
MAINTENANCE

34 PERIODICAL CHECKS

34.1 GENERAL

Periodical checks are used to check correct operation of the radio equipment without the presence of any
alarm condition.

The SCT/LCT programs running on the PC are used for the purpose.

34.2 CHECKS TO BE CARRIED OUT

The following checks must be carried out:

• check of the transmitted power;

• check of the received field strength (the reading must match the value resulting from hop calcula-
tions);

• check of the bit error ratio and the hop performances.

For checking procedures, please refer to SCT/LCT program and relevant help–on line.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


289
35 TROUBLESHOOTING

35.1 GENERAL

The AL equipment consists of the following replaceable parts:

• LIM

• RIM

• CONTROLLER
• ODU.

Purpose of the troubleshooting is to pinpoint the faulty part and replace it with spare.

Warning: the replacement of the faulty CONTROLLER module with spare causes the spare CONTROLLER
to be re–programmed. To the purpose refer to chapter 26 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU
WITH INTEGRATED ANTENNA (KIT V32307, V32308, V32309) and 28 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF
THE 4 GHz ODU WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA (KIT V32323) for the relevant procedure.

35.2 TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE

Troubleshooting starts as soon as one of the following alarm condition: IDU/ODU/REM is switched ON on
the IDU panel from (see Fig.215) or alarm messages are displayed by managers SCT/LCT.

Two methods are used to troubleshoot the cause of fault:

• loop facilities

• alarm message processing using the manager SCT/LCT

35.2.1 Loop facilities

The equipment is provided with different loops with the aid to locate the faulty equipment and then the
faulty module the equipment consists of.
Warning: the majority of loops causes the traffic to be lost.

The available loops are the following:

• local tributary loops: usually used to test the cables interfacing the equipment upstreams

• remote tributary loops: usually used to test the two direction link performance making use of an
unused 2 Mbit/s signal.

• baseband loop: it permits to test the LIM circuits

• IDU loop: it permits to test the complete IDU

• RF loop: it permits to test the complete radio terminal

290
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
35.2.2 Alarm messages processing

When an alarm condition occurs, the equipment generates a number of alarm messages that appear on
the SCT windows ie: log history area and equipment view current alarm.

Investigation on the alarm message meaning permits to troubleshoot the faulty module.

Alarm message organisation

The alarms (traps) are organized as alarm grouping relevant to a specific functions performed by the equip-
ment.

The alarm grouping is available only in the view current alarm submenu.

What follows is the list of the alarm grouping:

• COMMON – alarms which are not related to a specific part of the equipment but relevant to the link
as EOC radio link alarm or link telemetry fail. If these alarms are ON the link is lost. Investigation
must be made on a possible bad propagation or equipment failure. See the condition of the others
alarm grouping.

• LIM – This grouping may generate alarms for the following causes:

- external fault: tributary loss signal

- LIM failure: i.e. multiplexer/demultiplexer failure or modulator/demodulator failure.


Warning: The modulator/demodulator circuitry is spread into the LIM and RIM modules. Substi-
tution method is the only way to pingpoint the faulty module

- alarm that can be propagated by RIM or ODU modules as baseband Rx alarm.


The Baseband loop permits to discover if the cause of this alarm activation is external or internal
to the LIM. If yes the module must be replaced.

• RIM – This grouping may generate alarms for the following causes:

- external fault: demodulator fail alarm and local ODU alarm are generated when the ODU be-
comes faulty.

- RIM failure – power supply alarm along with cable short/open alarms or modulator/demodulator
alarms are activated.
Warning: the modulator/demodulator circuitry is spread into the LIM and RIM modules. Substi-
tution methods is the only way to pinpoint the faulty module.

• RT – This grouping may generate alarms for the following causes:


- external fault: Rx power low alarm is generated given by a bad propagation or by a faulty remote
terminal.

- ODU failure: PSU fail alarm or RF VCO alarm or RT IF alarm is activated. If this happens, replace
the ODU.

• UNIT – This grouping generates alarms when one of the units, the equipment consists of, is faulty
or does not respond to the controller polling. Replace the faulty unit.

• CONTROLLER – There is not an alarm message relevant to a controller module failure. An alarm
condition causes Led IDU to steady lights up.
Warning: The replacement of controller module requires the spare to be realigned (see chapter 26
INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE ODU WITH INTEGRATED ANTENNA (KIT V32307, V32308,
V32309) or 28 INSTALLATION ONTO THE POLE OF THE 4 GHz ODU WITH SEPARATED ANTENNA
(KIT V32323)).

2Mb/s 2Mb/s 2Mb/s 2Mb/s

FAIL
Trib: A-B-C-D Trib: E-F-G-H Trib: I-J-K-L Trib: M-N-O-P
1 UNITA'
IDU ODU TX RX
A R 1 WAY
Q3 2 SIDE
REM TEST
LCT USER IN/OUT RS232 CH1 CH2 2Mb/s

Alarm area

Fig.215 - IDU front

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


291
36 EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION UPLOAD/SAVE/
DOWNLOAD. PARAMETER MODIFICATION AND
CREATION OF VIRTUAL CONFIGURATIONS.

36.1 SCOPE

This chapter describes the procedure to create configuration files.

Equipment configuration files must be used in case of replacing a faulty CONTROLLER module with the
spare. To the purpose it is necessary to upload, from each equipment the network consists of, equipment
configurations and save them on three configuration files.

It is advisable to do it upon the first installation. Configuration file download on the spare CONTROLLER
permits to restore previous operating condition. It is also possible to create virtual configuration without
being connected to equipment.

36.2 PROCEDURE

To configure the spare CONTROLLER the following must be uploaded/saved on the file/downloaded:

• general equipment configuration

• addresses and routing table

• remote element table

To do it, run the SCT/LCT program (see relevant documentation available on line) until “Subnetwork Craft
Terminal” application window is displayed.

36.2.1 General equipment configuration

Upload and save

1 Select Open Configuration Template from Tools menu following this path: Tools → Equipment
Configuration Wizard → File → Open Configuration Template.
The system will show Template Selection window.

2 Choose from Template Selection window the type of equipment and version (for instance radio PDH
AL: 2x2, 4x2, 8x2, 16x2 Mbit/s) from which you want to make the upload.

3 Press OK.
The system will display the Configuration Wizard window referring to the selected type of equipment
and version (example: radio PDH AL: 2x2, 4x2, 8x2, 16x2 Mbit/s)

4 Press Upload push button and select Get Current Type Configuration from Equipment.
The system will display the Upload Configuration File window. The window will show the equipment
list.

5 Select the equipment you wish to upload a configuration file from (normally the local equipment)
by activating the relevant box.

292
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
6 Press OK.
The system displays the Communication Status window where is pointed out:

- the operation status: upload in progress/complete.

- errors area: where error messages relevant to possible abort of the operation are displayed.

At the end of the operation by pressing OK, the system displays, the uploaded equipment parame-
ters present into the Configuration Wizard window.

7 Save the uploaded configuration into a file by selecting Save File As command from File Save
Save File As.
The system will display Save This Config. File.
Type the file name into the proper box (with “cfg” extension) and set the path to be used to save
the file.

8 Press Save push button to finish.

Download

After having installed the spare LIM proceed as follows:

1 Select Open File from Tools menu following this path: Tools menu → Equipment Configuration
Wizard → File → Open → Open File.
The system will display Select a Config. File window.

2 Select the wanted file and open it by pushing Open push button. The system will display the file
content.

3 Press Download push button and select Configure Equipment as Current File.

4 Activate the box relevant to the equipment you wish to download configuration file to (normally the
local equipment) and select Configure Equipment as Current File.
5 Press OK.
The system displays the Communication Status window where is pointed out:

- the operation status: upload in progress/completed

- errors area: where error messages relevant to possible abort of operation are displayed.

6 Press OK to finish.

36.2.2 Addresses and routing table

Upload and save

1 Select Open Address Configuration Template from Tools menu following this path: Tools menu
→ Equipment Configuration Wizard → File → Open → Open Address Configuration Template.
The system will show the mask of the Address Configuration Template.

2 Press Upload push button and select Get Current Type Configuration from Equipment.
The system will display the Upload Configuration File window.

3 Select the equipment you wish to upload a configuration from (normally the local equipment).

4 Press OK.
The system displays the Communication Status window where is pointed out:

- the operation status: upload in progress

- errors area: where error messages relevant to possible abort of the operation are displayed.

At the end of the operation, the system displays, the equipment parameter present into the Con-
figuration Wizard window.

5 Save the uploaded configuration into a file by selecting Save File As command from File → Save
→ Save File As

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


293
The system will display the Save This Config. File window. Into the proper boxes type the file name
(with “cfg” extension) and set the path to be used to save the file.

6 Press Save push button to finish.

Download

1 Select Open File command from Tools menu following this path: Tools → Equipment Configuration
Wizard → File → Open → Open File.
The system will display Select a Config. File window.

2 Select the wanted file and open it by pushing Open push button. The system will display the pa-
rameters contained into the file.

3 Press Download push button and select Configure Equipment as Current File.

4 Activate the box relevant to the equipment you wish to download configuration file to (normally the
local equipment).

5 Press OK.
The system will display Download Type Selection window. Activate boxes IP port addresses config-
uration e Routing table. If OSPF facility is enabled, you can only select Standard (IP/Communi-
cation/OSPF) Settings.

6 Press OK.
The system will show a warning indicating the possibility to proceed the download or not.

7 Press OK.
The system will show the Download in progress.

8 At the end of the download will be shown the file content.

36.2.3 Remote Element Table

Upload and save

1 Select window Subnetwork Configuration Wizard from menu Tools.

2 Select equipment Local from Actual Configuration Area and then press Retrieve. In New configu-
ration area is shown the list of remote equipment included the local.

3 Press Save to file. The system will show window Save remote element configuration file.

4 Save the file with Rel extension and then press Save to finish.

Download

1 Select Subnetwork Configuration Wizard from menu Tool.


2 Press Read from file and then select the desired file (with Rel extension).

3 Press Open push button and then the system will show the file content into the New Configuration
Area.

4 Select into the Actual configuration area the equipment you desire to download, the list of the re-
mote element included the local.

5 Press Send to send the list.

294
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
37 BACK UP FULL EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION
WITHOUT POSSIBILITY OF MODIFYING THE PA-
RAMETERS

37.1 SCOPE

This chapter describes the procedure to back up the full equipment configuration. This permits to recover
the original equipment configuration in case of faulty CONTROLLER module replacement with spare.

37.2 CONFIGURATION UPLOAD

Foreword: it is advisable to upload the configuration during the first installation. Proceed as follows:

1 Select “Equipment Configuration Wizard” from menu “Tools”; “Equipment Configuration Wiz-
ard” window will be displayed.

2 Select “Upload” and then “Backup Full Equipment Configuration”; “Template Selection” win-
dow will be displayed.
3 Select the correct equipment template (in case of uncorrected choice the backup will be aborted).

4 Press OK and then select the equipment to be uploaded from “Upload Configuration File” window.

5 Press OK and then edit the file name from “Save backup as” window.
6 Press Save; “Equipment Configuration Wizard: Complete Backup” window will appear.
The window shows dynamically the backup procedure. If everything is OK, at the end of the upload
will appear the word “done” showing the procedure success.

7 Press OK to finish.

37.3 CONFIGURATION DOWNLOAD

Once the spare LIM has been installed proceed as follows:

1 Select “Equipment Configuration Wizard” from menu “Tools”. “Equipment Configuration Wizard”
window will be displayed.

2 Select “Download” and than “Restore Full Equipment Configuration” from Equipment Config-
uration Wizard. “Select Backup File” window will be displayed.

3 Select the wanted backup file with extension .bku and then press Open. “Download Configuration
File” window will be displayed.

4 Select the equipment to download and then press OK; “Equipment Configuration Wizard: Complete
restore” window will be displayed. This window shows dynamically the download operation. The
word “done” indicates that download has been successfully.

5 Press OK to finish.

Warning: In case of EOC alarm proceed to restart the equipment.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


295
296
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Section 6.
PROGRAMMING AND SUPERVI-
SION

38 PROGRAMMING AND SUPERVISION

38.1 GENERAL

The radio equipment was designed to be easily programmed and supervised.

The following tools are implemented to the purpose:


• SCT Subnetwork Craft Terminal + LCT Local Craft Terminal. They are used for remote and local con-
trol of a subnetwork consisted of a maximum of 100 AL radio equipment.

• NMS5–UX Network Management. It is used for the remote control of an entire network consisted of
different SIAE equipment including AL family radio equipment.

For details refer to relevant documentation. SCT/LCT documentation is available as help on–line.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


297
298
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Section 7.
COMPOSITION

39 COMPOSITION OF MODULAR IDU

39.1 GENERAL

The IDU is available in following versions:


• 1+0 unduplicated

• 1+0/1+1 standard (see Fig.216)

• 1+1 ethernet high and low capacity


• 1+1 full duplicated

• 1+1 high capacity (see Fig.217)

• 2+0 repeater E/W (see Fig.218).

The 1+0 version is considered the minimum replaceable part while the 1+1 standard/full duplicated con-
sists of plug–in modules as LIM/RIM/CONTROLLER that can individually be replaced.

Module part number, hardware layout and equipment composition are subject to change without notice.

39.2 IDU PART NUMBER

Every version is identified by a specific part number shown on a label (see Fig.220) attached on IDU, top
left side. Important power supply informations are also written.

The P/N consists of seven digits with the following meaning:

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


299
Tab.63- IDU part number

Digit Letter/number Meaning

Functional assembly of units completed by a mechanical


1 G
structure

2 A AL equipment

3 I Indoor installation

0001 1+1 – 1 unit – 120 ohm BNC


0002 1+1 – 1 unit – 120 ohm RJ45
0003 1+1 – 1 unit – 75 ohm BNC 1.0/2.3
0004 1+0 – 1 unit – 120 ohm RJ45
0052 1+1 – 2 unit – 120 ohm BNC Full protected
4 to 7
0054 1+1 – 2 unit – 75 ohm BNC 32x2 1.0/2.3
0061–1 1+1 – 1 unit – Ethernet 75 ohm 1.0/2.3 64 Mbit/s RJ45
0062 2+0 – 2 unit – E/W 75 ohm BNC 1.0/2.3
0066 1+1 – 1 unit – Ethernet 75 ohm 1.0/2.3 100 Mbit/s RJ45
0153 1+1 - 1 unit - 16E1 + FE

39.3 COMPOSITION OF THE INDOOR UNIT

1+0/1+1 standard, Ethernet version

The IDU consists of LIM/RIM/CONTROLLER modules made–up in different versions. Each module is identi-
fied through internal label indicating the relevant P/N.

The P/Ns are the following:


- LIM D12034 option SUB_D 75 ohm
D12035 option SUB–D 120 ohm
D12036–02 option 1.0/2.3/75 ohm
D12089–02 Ethernet 64 Mbit/s (low capacity)
D12100 Ethernet 100 Mbit/s (high capacity)
D12168 Ethernet (4FE + 16E1)

- RIM D12037
D26000 100 Mbit/s

- CONTROLLER D12031 RJ45


D12032 BNC
D12033 AUI
D12095 RJ45 (for D12168)

1+1 2 units

The IDU consists of LIM/RIM/CONTROLLER modules made–up in different versions. Each module is identi-
fied through internal labels indicating the relevant P/N.

- LIM D12036–02 1.0/2.3 75 Ohm


D12086 expansion trib. 17 to 32 75 Ohm
- RIM D12037

- CONTROLLER D12031 RJ45


D12032 BNC
D12033 AUI
D12094 coldfire BNC (LCT USB in AL E/W)

300
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
2+0 2 units

The IDU consists of LIM/RIM/CONTROLLER modules made–up in different versions. Each module is identi-
fied through internal labels indicating the relevant P/N.

- LIM D12089 matrix in AL E/W 1.0/2.3 75 Ohm


D12052–02 processor unit

- RIM D12037

- CONTROLLER D12094 coldfire BNC (LCT USB in AL E/W)

RIM1
FAIL RIM2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
IDUODU TX RX
13 14 15 16
-
A R 1 WAY RIM1

+ +
Q3 2 SIDE
RIM2
REM TEST
LCT USER IN/OUT RS232 CH1 CH2 2Mb/s -

Fig.216 - Standard IDU GAI0003

RIM1
FAIL RIM2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
-

++ +
RIM1
FAIL RIM2
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
-

IDUODU TX RX
A R 1 WAY
Q3 2 SIDE
LCT REMTEST 2Mb/s
RS232 USER IN/OUT CH1 CH2

Fig.217 - IDU GAI0054

RIM1
FAIL RIM2

RIM1
FAIL RIM2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

FAIL

IDUODU TX RX
A WAY
Q3 SIDE
LCT RS232 REMTEST CH1 CH2 2Mb/s
USER IN/OUT

Fig.218 - IDU GAI0062

10-100 BaseT DPX 48V


RIM 1
FAIL RIM 2
+

LINK ACT
Trib: 1-8 Trib: 9-16
IDU ODU
1 2
TX RX
3 4
48V
-
A R 1 WAY RIM 1
Q3 2 SIDE
RIM 2
+

REM TEST
LCT RS232 USER IN/OUT CH1 CH2 2Mb/s -

Fig.219 - IDU GAI0153

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


301
Fig.220 - IDU P/N

302
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
40 COMPOSITION OF COMPACT IDU

40.1 GENERAL

The Compact IDU is offered in the following versions:

• 1+0

• 1+1.

40.2 ALC IDU PART NUMBER

The IDU is available in different versions, each of one identified by a specific part number. This P/N is shown
on a label attached on the IDU mechanical structure, top left side.

The P/N consists of seven digits with the following meaning:

Tab.64 - P/N meaning

Digit Letter/number Meaning


Functional assembly of units completed by a mechanical struc-
1 G
ture
2 A AL family
3 I Indoor installation
0069 16x2 - 75 Ohm - 1+1
0073 16x2 - 75 Ohm - 1+1EOW
0076 16x2 - 75 Ohm - 1+0
0078 16x2 - coax - 1+0
0079 8x2 - 75 - 1+0
0080 8x2 - 120 - 1+0
0081 8x2 - 120 - 1+1
4 to 7 0084 16x2 - 120 - 1+1
0085 8x2 - 75 - 1+1
0086 16x2 - 120 - 1+0
0087 8x2 - 120 - 1+0 EOW
0088 8x2 - 120 - 1+1 EOW
0089 4x2 - 120 - 1+0 V28
0090 4x2 - 120 - 1+1 V28
0091 16x2 - CX - 1+1 Eth

This part number together with unit serial number is printed on a label, SIAE or custom, positioned on unit
cover.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


303
41 COMPOSITION OF IDU COMPACT PLUS (ALC
PLUS)

41.1 OVERVIEW

The IDU Compact Plus is available in the following versions:

• 1+0

• 1+1.

41.2 PART NUMBER OF IDU

The IDU Plus Compact is available in different versions, each one identified by a specific part number. This
P/N is reported on a plate attached to the mechanical structure of the IDU, up to the left.

The P/N is composed by seven digits with the following meaning:

Digit Letter/number Meaning

Functional assembly of units completed by a mechanical


1 G
structure

2 A PDH family

3 I Indoor installation

0118 16E1 1+0


0119 16E1 1+1
from 4 to 7 0120 32E1 1+0
0121 32E1 1+1
0128 32E1 1+1 + 3ETH

This part number with the serial number of the unit is printed on a plate, of SIAE or of the customer, placed
on the cover of the unit.

304
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
42 COMPOSITION OF IDU PLUS

42.1 GENERAL

The IDU Plus is available in 1RU and 2RU. Main configurations are:

• terminal

• drop/insert

• nodal.

Part number, hardware layout and equipment composition can change without notice.

42.2 IDU PLUS PART NUMBER

Each version id identified by a specific part number shown on a label (see Fig.227), attached on IDU, top
left side. Important power supply information are also written.

The P/N consists of seven digits with the following meaning:

Tab.65 - IDU Plus part number


Digit Letter/number Description

Functional assembly of units completed by a mechanical


1 G
structure

2 A AL equipment

3 I Indoor installation

0115 1RU, 32E1, 1+0 terminal


0116 1RU, 32E1, 1+1 terminal
0123 2RU, 53E1, 1+1 terminal
from 4 to 7
0124 2RU, STM1, E1 nodal
0126 2RU, 32E1, drop/insert
0141 1RU, 24E1 + Ethernet, 1+1 terminal

42.3 COMPOSITION OF THE IDU PLUS

The IDU Plus consists of LIM/RIM/CONTROLLER/MATRIX modules made-up in different versions. Each
module is identified through internal label indicating the relevant P/N.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


305
The P/Ns are the following:

- LIM D12139 53x2 processor


D12137 LIM 32E1
D12164 + Ethernet

- RIM D26001

- MATRIX D12146 Matrix node STM1 16E1

- EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER D12148 Equipment controller


Subrack can be 1RU (see Fig.221) or 2RU (see Fig.222) high.

1 3

2 4

Fig.221 - IDU Plus 1RU composition

1 5

2 6

3 7

4 8

Fig.222 - IDU Plus 2RU composition

42.3.1 1+0 1RU 32E1 Terminal

The IDU consists of LIN/RIM/CONTROLLER modules made-up in different versions. Each module is identi-
fied through internal labels indicating the relevant P/N.

Example: GAI 0115

- position 1 LIM D12137

- position 2 RIM D26001

- position 3 Eq. controller D12148

42.3.2 1+1 1RU 24E1 Terminal

The IDU consists of LIN/RIM/CONTROLLER modules made-up in different versions. Each module is identi-
fied through internal labels indicating the relevant P/N.

Example: GAI 0141

- position 1 LIM D12164

- position 3 RIM D26001

- position 4 RIM D26001

- position 2 Eq. controller D12148

306
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
10-100 BaseT DPX 48V

FAIL

+
LINK ACT
Trib: 1-8 Trib: 9-16
Q3/2
Trib: 17-24
Q3/1 IDUODU
1 2 3 4 -
A R WAY
SIDE

+
REM TEST
LCT RS232 USER IN/OUT CH1 CH2 2Mb/s
-

Fig.223 - 24E1 1+1 terminal

42.3.3 1+1 1RU 32E1 terminal

The IDU consists of LIN/RIM/CONTROLLER modules made-up in different versions. Each module is identi-
fied through internal labels indicating the relevant P/N.

Example: GAI 0116

- position 1 LIM D12137

- position 3 RIM D26001

- position 4 RIM D26001

- position 2 Eq. controller D12148

FAIL

+
Trib: 1-8 Trib: 9-16
Q3/2 Q3/1
Trib: 17-24
IDU ODU
Trib: 25-32
-
A R WAY
SIDE

LCT RS232 USER IN/OUT


REM TEST
CH1 CH2 2Mb/s + -

Fig.224 - IDU Plus 1+1 terminal

42.3.4 1+1 terminal 2RU 53E1

The IDU consists of LIN/RIM/CONTROLLER modules made-up in different versions. Each module is identi-
fied through internal labels indicating the relevant P/N.

Example: GAI 0123

- position 1 Eq. controller D12148

- position 2 LIM D12137

- position 3 53E1 expansion D12151

- position 5 RIM D26001

- position 6 RIM D26001


Q3/2 Q3/1 IDU ODU
A R WAY
SIDE
REM TEST
CH1 CH2 2Mb/s
-
+

LCT RS232 USER IN/OUT

FAIL
Trib: 1-8 Trib: 9-16 Trib: 17-24 Trib: 25-32
-
+

FAIL
Trib: 33-40 Trib: 41-48 Trib: 49-53

Fig.225 - 53E1 1+1 terminal

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


307
42.3.5 2RU 32E1 drop/insert

The IDU consists of LIN/RIM/CONTROLLER modules made-up in different versions. Each module is identi-
fied through internal labels indicating the relevant P/N.

Example: GAI 0126

- position 1 Eq. controller D12148

- position 2 53E1 processor D12139

- position 3 Matrix 32E1 D12143


- position 5,6 RIM D26001

Q3/2 Q3/1 IDU ODU


A R WAY
SIDE
REM TEST

+
LCT RS232 USER IN/OUT CH1 CH2 2Mb/s
-
FAIL

+
-

FAIL
Trib: 1-8 Trib: 9-16 Trib: 17-24 Trib: 25-32

Fig.226 - Drop/insert IDU Plus 32E1

42.3.6 Nodal 2RU STM1 E1

The IDU consists of LIN/RIM/CONTROLLER modules made-up in different versions. Each module is identi-
fied through internal labels indicating the relevant P/N.

- position 1 Eq. controller D12148

- position 2 53E1 processor D12139

- position 3 Matrix node STM1 16E1D12146

- position 4 53E1 processor D12139


- position 5,6,7,8 RIM D26001

Fig.227 - IDU Plus P/N

308
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
43 COMPOSITION OF OUTDOOR UNIT

43.1 GENERAL

The ODU consists of a mechanical structure that houses all the transceiver circuitry. In 1+1 version the
connection to the antenna is performed through a passive hybrid.

Both transceiver and hybrid are offered in different versions depending on the operating bands, the anten-
na configuration etc...

A label (see Fig.228) attached on the ODU structure shows the most significant parameters as go/return
frequency value, subband, operating band and part number.

From ODU name (e.g. AL18 or AS18) you can see the version of used ODU.

For example the P/N GA0001/001, shown by the label, identifies the following:
- AL18 18 GHz operating band

- G/R 1010 MHz go/return frequency value

- SB 1L operating subband low

- S/N serial number

- DATA CODE month and year

A further label is available attached on the hybrid body as per example of Fig.229.

It shows the position of each transceiver and the type of coupler, balanced or unbalanced.

Warning: In case of unbalanced type the lowest loss is always referred to branch 1.

In Tab.66 various ODU versions and hybrid part number are listed.

Part number, hardware layout and equipment composition are subject to change without notice.

Tab.66 - Example of ODU part number and hybrid part number

ODU Hybrid with support


RF Band in GHz
1L 1H Balanced Unbalanced

13 GA9018 GA9019 V32218 V32219

18 GA9000 GA9001 V32184 V32185

23 GA9006 GA9007 V32186 V32187

38 GA9014 GA9015 V32210 V32230

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


309
Fig.228 - Label attached on the ODU mechanical body AL

310
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Fig.229 - Position of the label on the hybrid body and typical hybrid characteristics

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


311
312
ALS - MN.00183.E - 003
Section 8.
LISTS AND SERVICES

44 LIST OF FIGURES

Fig.1 - Components electrostatic charge sensitive indication................................................ 14

Fig.2 - Elasticized band .................................................................................................. 14


Fig.3 - Coiled cord ......................................................................................................... 14

Fig.4 - Laser indication................................................................................................... 14

Fig.5 - WEEE symbol - 2002/96/CE EN50419 .................................................................... 15


Fig.6 - 1+1 ODU typical configuration with integrated antenna ............................................ 26

Fig.7 - 1+1 Modular IDU – up to 16x2 Mbit/s capacity ........................................................ 26

Fig.8 - 1+1 Modular IDU - up to 16x2 Mbit/s capacity with 4x10/100BaseT ports ................... 26

Fig.9 - Compact IDU - up to 16x2 Mbit/s with 3x10/100BaseT ports ..................................... 26

Fig.10 - Modular IDU PLUS 1+0/1+1 - up to 53x2 Mbit/s capacity........................................ 27

Fig.11 - Modular IDU Plus 1+1 - up to 24x2 Mbit/s capacity and 4x10/100BaseT ports ........... 27
Fig.12 - Modular IDU Plus nodal with matrix - up to 16x2 Mbit/s and 1xSTM-1 capacity .......... 27

Fig.13 - Compact IDU PLUS 1+1 (32E1 + 3ETH)................................................................ 27

Fig.14 - 1+1 IDU Modular configuration – Micro coaxial tributary connectors ......................... 33

Fig.15 - 1+1 IDU Modular – Ethernet tributary connectors .................................................. 33

Fig.16 - 1+1 IDU Modular – D type tributary connectors ..................................................... 33

Fig.17 - 1+1 Modular IDU (34, 2x34 Mbit/s) ..................................................................... 33

Fig.18 - 1+1 Modular IDU high capacity configuration – Micro coaxial tributary connectors ...... 34

Fig.19 - 1+1 Modular IDU high capacity configuration – D type tributary connectors............... 34

Fig.20 - IDU Modular Plus 1U - 32x2 Mbit/s....................................................................... 34

Fig.21 - IDU Modular Plus 1+1 2U - 16x2 Mbit/s + STM1 nodal 4+0 ..................................... 34

Fig.22 IDU Modular Plus 1+1 2U (up to 53x2 Mbit/s).......................................................... 34

Fig.23 - IDU Compact 1+0 (2x2/4x2 Mbit/s) ..................................................................... 34

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003 313


Fig.24 - IDU Compact 1+1 (2x2/4x2/8x2/16x2 Mbit/s)....................................................... 35

Fig.25 - IDU Compact 1+1 (coax. connector up to 16x2 Mbit/s) + Ethernet module ............... 35

Fig.26 - IDU Compact Plus 1+1 (32E1 + 3ETH) ................................................................. 35

Fig.27 - IDU Compact Plus 1+0 (16E1)............................................................................. 35

Fig.28 - 1+0 ODU AL with separated antenna (pole mounting) ............................................ 35

Fig.29 - 1+1 ODU AL with separated antenna.................................................................... 36

Fig.30 - 1+0 ODU AL with integral antenna (pole mounting) ............................................... 36


Fig.31 - 1+1 ODU AL with integral antenna (pole mounting) ............................................... 37

Fig.32 - 1+1 ODU AL with separated antenna (wall mounting)............................................. 38

Fig.33 - ODU AS 1+1 with separated antenna ................................................................... 39

Fig.34 - LIM block diagram – Tx side................................................................................ 53

Fig.35 - Single tributary multiplexing/demultiplexing.......................................................... 54

Fig.36 - 2x2 Mbit/s multiplexing/demultiplexing................................................................. 54

Fig.37 - 4x2 Mbit/s multiplexing/demultiplexing................................................................. 54

Fig.38 - 8x2 Mbit/s multiplexing/demultiplexing................................................................. 55

Fig.39 - 16x2 Mbit/s multiplexing/demultiplexing ............................................................... 56

Fig.40 - 32x2 multiplexing/demultiplexing ........................................................................ 57


Fig.41 - Multiplexing/demultiplexing 2x34 Mbit/s ............................................................... 57

Fig.42 - LIM block diagram – Rx side ............................................................................... 58

Fig.43 - RIM block diagram............................................................................................. 59


Fig.44 - Main and peripheral controller connection ............................................................. 60

Fig.45 - IP/IPoverOSI protocol stack ................................................................................ 61

Fig.46 - IDU loopback .................................................................................................... 62

Fig.47 - RIM block diagram............................................................................................. 75

Fig.48 - Main and peripheral controller connection ............................................................. 76

Fig.49 - IP/IPoverOSI protocol stack ................................................................................ 76


Fig.50 - IDU loopback .................................................................................................... 77

Fig.51 - LIM Ethernet 2 Mbit/s block diagram .................................................................... 78

Fig.52 - Tag control into field .......................................................................................... 79


Fig.53 - Output queues .................................................................................................. 79

Fig.54 - ToS/DSCP tag position into IP packets .................................................................. 79

Fig.55 - ToS/DSCP......................................................................................................... 80
Fig.56 - IDU + 1RU composition ...................................................................................... 83

Fig.57 - IDU + 2RU composition ...................................................................................... 84

Fig.58 - IDU Plus 2RU drop/insert and nodal structure ........................................................ 86


Fig.59 - Nodal connections in 3 subracks .......................................................................... 88

Fig.60 - Nodal connections in 2 subracks .......................................................................... 88

Fig.61 - Nodal - 12 max radio directions, max 6xstm-1, max 48E1 all disconnecting, no blocking .
89

Fig.62 - LIM block diagram - Tx side ................................................................................ 98

Fig.63 - LIM block diagram - Rx side ................................................................................ 99


Fig.64 - RIM block diagram........................................................................................... 100

Fig.65 - Main and peripheral controller connection ........................................................... 101

314 ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


Fig.66 - IP/IPoverOSI protocol stack .............................................................................. 101

Fig.67 - IDU loopback .................................................................................................. 102

Fig.68 - Compact IDU PLUS 1+1 (32E1 + 3ETH).............................................................. 103

Fig.69 - IDU for E/W repeater ....................................................................................... 104

Fig.70 - Block diagram of IDU with Cross Connection Matrix .............................................. 108

Fig.71 - RIM block diagram........................................................................................... 112

Fig.72 - Main and peripheral controller connection ........................................................... 113


Fig.73 - IP/IPoverOSI protocol stack .............................................................................. 114

Fig.74 - IDU E/W loops ................................................................................................ 115

Fig.75 - 1+0 AL ODU .................................................................................................. 121

Fig.76 - 1+1 AL ODU ................................................................................................... 121

Fig.77 - 1+0 AS or Universal ODU version ...................................................................... 122

Fig.78 - ODU block diagram (both versions).................................................................... 123

Fig.79 - 1+1 hot stand–by 1 antenna ............................................................................. 124

Fig.80 - 1+1 hot stand–by 2 antennas ........................................................................... 124

Fig.81 - ATPC operation ............................................................................................... 125

Fig.82 - DC/DC converter front coverplate ...................................................................... 126


Fig.83 - 24/48 V DC/DC converter connections to IDU 1+0 ............................................... 128

Fig.84 - 24/48 V DC/DC converter connections to IDU 1+1 ............................................... 129

Fig.85 - Grounding connection ...................................................................................... 134


Fig.86 - User connector position, 1+1 version with LIM 16x2 Mbit/s ................................... 135

Fig.87 - User connector position, 1+1 version with LIM 4x2 Mbit/s and 3x10/100BaseT ........ 136

Fig.88 - User connector position, 1+1 version with LIM 16x2 Mbit/s and 4x10/100BaseT....... 136

Fig.89 - IDU Compact 1+1 (2x2/4x2/8x2/16x2 Mbit/s)..................................................... 140

Fig.90 - IDU Plus 1+1 (up to 32x2 Mbit/s) ...................................................................... 144

Fig.91 - IDU Plus 1+1 (up to 53x2 Mbit/s) ...................................................................... 144


Fig.92 - Nodal IDU Plus 2 units - 16x2 Mbit/s + STM1, 4+0 version ................................... 145

Fig.93 - Modular IDU Plus - 24x2 Mbit/s and 4x10/100BaseT............................................. 145

Fig.94 - Pin-out Tributary 50 pin SCSI female ................................................................. 146


Fig.95 - IDU Compact Plus 1+0 (16E1)........................................................................... 151

Fig.96 - IDU Compact Plus 1+1 (32E1 + 3ETH) ............................................................... 151

Fig.97 - Pin-out Tributary 50 pin SCSI female ................................................................. 152


Fig.98 - Antisliding strip ............................................................................................... 161

Fig.99 - 60–114 mm pole supporting plate fixing ............................................................. 162

Fig.100 - Adapting kit for 219 mm pole .......................................................................... 163


Fig.101 - Mounting position .......................................................................................... 164

Fig.102 - Possible positions of the support with ODU fast locking mechanism...................... 165

Fig.103 - Band-it pole mounting kit................................................................................ 166

Fig.104 - Installation onto the pole of the supporting plate................................................ 167

Fig.105 - Position of the ODU body depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisation
is always vertical: handle at the left side. ........................................................................ 168
Fig.106 - ODU body reference tooth............................................................................... 169

Fig.107 - Final ODU assembly of 1+1 version .................................................................. 170

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003 315


Fig.108 - ODU grounding.............................................................................................. 171

Fig.109 - Kit V32409.................................................................................................... 172

Fig.110 - Kit V32415.................................................................................................... 173

Fig.111 - Wall supporting plate ..................................................................................... 178

Fig.112 - Support with ODU fast locking mechanism ........................................................ 179

Fig.113 - Mounting possible positions ............................................................................. 180

Fig.114 - Installation onto the wall of the supporting plate ................................................ 181
Fig.115 - Position of the ODU body depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisation
is always vertical: handle at the left side. ........................................................................ 182

Fig.116 - ODU body reference tooth............................................................................... 183

Fig.117 - Final ODU assembly of 1+1 version .................................................................. 184


Fig.118 - ODU grounding.............................................................................................. 185

Fig.119 - Kit V32409.................................................................................................... 186

Fig.120 - Kit V32415.................................................................................................... 187


Fig.121 - Centring ring position ..................................................................................... 193

Fig.122 - Antislide strip ................................................................................................ 194

Fig.123 - Support mount on pole ................................................................................... 195

Fig.124 - Supporting system position ............................................................................. 196

Fig.125 - Hole E .......................................................................................................... 196

Fig.126 - Antenna installation on pole support................................................................. 197

Fig.127 -Position of the ODU handle depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisation
is always horizontal. Handle at the right side.................................................................... 197

Fig.128 - Support system for ODU housing and reference tooth in evidence ........................ 198

Fig.129 - ODU body reference tooth............................................................................... 199

Fig.130 - ODU housing final position for vertical polarization ............................................. 200

Fig.131 - ODU housing final position for horizontal polarization .......................................... 200
Fig.132 - Hybrid and polarization disk ............................................................................ 201

Fig.133 - Polarization disk fixing (only for 13GHz and 15 GHz)........................................... 202

Fig.134 - Hybrid mount on pole support ......................................................................... 203

Fig.135 - ODU housing final position for 1+1 version........................................................ 204

Fig.136 - Vertical and horizontal adjustments.................................................................. 205

Fig.137 - Antenna aiming block ..................................................................................... 206

Fig.138 - ODU grounding.............................................................................................. 207

Fig.139 - 1+0 pole mounting ........................................................................................ 212

Fig.140 - ODU body reference tooth............................................................................... 213


Fig.141 - Position of the ODU handle depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisa-
tion is always horizontal. Handle at the right side. ............................................................ 213

Fig.142 - 1+0 support.................................................................................................. 214

Fig.143 - ODU housing final position for both polarization ................................................. 215

Fig.144 - Antenna aiming ............................................................................................. 216

Fig.145 - ODU grounding.............................................................................................. 217

Fig.146 - Hybrid and twist disk...................................................................................... 218

Fig.147 - Polarization disk fixing (only for 13 GHz and 15 GHz).......................................... 219

Fig.148 - Hybrid installation .......................................................................................... 220

316 ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


Fig.149 - 1+1 ODUs installation .................................................................................... 221

Fig.150 - 1+0 pole mounting ........................................................................................ 227

Fig.151 - ODU body reference tooth............................................................................... 228

Fig.152 - Position of the ODU handle depending on the polarisation for 1+0. For 1+1 the polarisa-
tion is always horizontal. Handle at the right side. ............................................................ 228

Fig.153 - 1+0 support.................................................................................................. 229

Fig.154 - ODU housing final position for both polarization ................................................. 230

Fig.155 - Antenna aiming ............................................................................................. 231

Fig.156 - ODU grounding.............................................................................................. 232

Fig.157 - Hybrid and twist disk...................................................................................... 233

Fig.158 - Polarization disk fixing (only for 13 GHz and 15 GHz).......................................... 234
Fig.159 - Hybrid installation .......................................................................................... 235

Fig.160 - 1+1 ODUs installation .................................................................................... 236

Fig.161 - Pole installation of the support......................................................................... 240


Fig.162 - Installation of the hybrid on the pole support (only for 1+1 version) ..................... 241

Fig.163 - Installation of the ODU on the support .............................................................. 242

Fig.164 - ODU grounding and connection of the cables to hybrid and antenna ..................... 243

Fig.165 - Detected voltage versus RF received signal ....................................................... 248

Fig.166 - Local Lan–1 port to remote Lan–1 port connection ............................................. 249

Fig.167 - Selection of Ethernet Throughput ..................................................................... 250

Fig.168 - Tributary enable ............................................................................................ 251

Fig.169 - Switch general settings................................................................................... 252

Fig.170 - Lan–1 interface settings.................................................................................. 252

Fig.171 - Vlan settings for Lan–1 ................................................................................... 253

Fig.172 - Priority setting for Lan–1 and Internal Port ........................................................ 253

Fig.173 - Vlan settings for Internal Port .......................................................................... 254


Fig.174 - Vlan Configuration Table ................................................................................. 254

Fig.175 - Virtual Lan input and output settings at Lan–1 port ............................................ 255

Fig.176 - Vlan Configuration Table with some Vlans ......................................................... 256

Fig.177 - Add a new Vlan ID to Vlan Configuration Table with output tagged ....................... 256

Fig.178 - Layer 2 and Layer 3 priority management ......................................................... 257

Fig.179 - 3 to 1 port connections ................................................................................... 257


Fig.180 - Input and output setting for VLANs at Lan–1 port............................................... 258

Fig.181 - Output port properties for VLAN 3301............................................................... 259

Fig.182 - Typology 3 to 1, Virtual Lan Configuration ......................................................... 259


Fig.183 - Output Queue selection on the basis of TOS/DSCP priority................................... 260

Fig.184 - Output properties of VLAN 701 ........................................................................ 261

Fig.185 - Typology 3 to 1, Virtual Lan Configuration Table with Vlan................................... 261

Fig.186 - Queue selection ............................................................................................. 262

Fig.187 - Management of tagged frames according with their priority tag............................ 263

Fig.188 - Incoming packets at Lan–1 will exit to other ports unchanged according their incoming
status. ........................................................................................................................ 263

Fig.189 - Baseband configuration .................................................................................. 265

Fig.190 - Configuration of radio branch of one direction .................................................... 266

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003 317


Fig.191 - Presetting of radio branch of one direction ........................................................ 267

Fig.192 - Tributary enabling window .............................................................................. 268

Fig.193 - Cross connection window in a link with East and West sides configured as 4x2 Mbit/s ...
268
Fig.194 - Protected tributary connection (Drop/Insert in a PDH ring) in a link with East and West
configured as 16x2 Mbit/s ............................................................................................. 269

Fig.195 - Protection policy of a tributary stream .............................................................. 270


Fig.196 - East/West Pass–through connection in a link with East and West configured as 16x2 Mbit/
s ................................................................................................................................ 270

Fig.197 - Configurator.................................................................................................. 272

Fig.198 - Radio/Tributary ............................................................................................. 273

Fig.199 - Switch parameters of the cross-connections ...................................................... 274

Fig.200 - Tributary loop on radio side............................................................................. 274

Fig.201 - Radio/radio cross-connection........................................................................... 275

Fig.202 - Tributary/Tributary Cross-connection................................................................ 276

Fig.203 - Subnetwork Craft Terminal - Communication setup ............................................ 277

Fig.204 - IP Ethernet ................................................................................................... 278


Fig.205 - LCT PPP ........................................................................................................ 279

Fig.206 - PPP Radio ..................................................................................................... 279

Fig.207 - Store Routing Table ....................................................................................... 280

Fig.208 - Stored Routing Table...................................................................................... 281

Fig.209 - Subnetwork Configuration Wizard .................................................................... 282

Fig.210 - Subnetwork Configuration Wizard - Actual Configuration ..................................... 283


Fig.211 - Add new station............................................................................................. 284

Fig.212 - Add New Network Element .............................................................................. 285

Fig.213 - Subnetwork Configuration Wizard .................................................................... 286


Fig.214 - Subnetwork Configuration Wizard .................................................................... 287

Fig.215 - IDU front ...................................................................................................... 291

Fig.216 - Standard IDU GAI0003 ................................................................................... 301

Fig.217 - IDU GAI0054 ................................................................................................ 301

Fig.218 - IDU GAI0062 ................................................................................................ 301

Fig.219 - IDU GAI0153 ................................................................................................ 301

Fig.220 - IDU P/N........................................................................................................ 302

Fig.221 - IDU Plus 1RU composition ............................................................................... 306

Fig.222 - IDU Plus 2RU composition ............................................................................... 306


Fig.223 - 24E1 1+1 terminal......................................................................................... 307

Fig.224 - IDU Plus 1+1 terminal .................................................................................... 307

Fig.225 - 53E1 1+1 terminal......................................................................................... 307

Fig.226 - Drop/insert IDU Plus 32E1 .............................................................................. 308

Fig.227 - IDU Plus P/N ................................................................................................. 308

Fig.228 - Label attached on the ODU mechanical body AL ................................................. 310

Fig.229 - Position of the label on the hybrid body and typical hybrid characteristics .............. 311

318 ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


45 LIST OF TABLES

Tab.1 - Artificial respiration .............................................................................................13

Tab.2 - Ethernet traffic capacity according to the number of used E1.....................................29

Tab.3 - Transmission capacity Modular IDU Plus .................................................................30

Tab.4 - IDU consumption ...............................................................................................31

Tab.5 - Guaranteed current absorbition for power supply connector ......................................32

Tab.6 - IDU/ODU dimensions ...........................................................................................32

Tab.7 - IDU/ODU weight .................................................................................................33

Tab.8 - Optical interface characteristics .............................................................................42

Tab.9 - Aggregate frame .................................................................................................48


Tab.10 - Switching priority ..............................................................................................49

Tab.11 - Aggregate frame ...............................................................................................64

Tab.12 - Switching priority ..............................................................................................65


Tab.13 - IDU Plus possible terminal configurations ..............................................................84

Tab.14 - Capacity change ................................................................................................90

Tab.15 - Switching priority ..............................................................................................93

Tab.16 - Transmission capacity of the IDU Compact Plus with Ethernet................................ 103

Tab.17 - Nominal output power (1+0 version) AL ODU/AS ODU (±1 dB tolerance) ................ 117

Tab.18 - Transmit alarm priority..................................................................................... 120

Tab.19 - Characteristics of the cables.............................................................................. 133

Tab.20 - Tributary connector pin–out (Sub-D 25 pin male)................................................. 136

Tab.21 - Q3 connector pin–out for 10/100BaseT Ethernet connection Pin Description (RJ45) .. 137

Tab.22 - LCT connector pin–out for connection to supervision system (Sub-D 9 pin male) ...... 137

Tab.23 - RSR232 connector pin–out for supervision system (Sub-D 9 pin male).................... 137

Tab.24 - CH1 connector pin–out for 9600 bit/s – V.24 interface (RJ45) ................................ 138

Tab.25 - CH1 connector pin–out for 1x9600 or 2x4800 kbit/s – V.28 interface (RJ45)............ 138

Tab.26 - CH2 connector pin–out for 64 kbit/s channel – V.11 interface (RJ45) ...................... 138

Tab.27 - 2 Mbit/s wayside connector pin–out (RJ45) ......................................................... 139

Tab.28 - User in/out connector pin–out for external alarm input and alarm transfer to outside (Sub-
D 9 pin male) ............................................................................................................... 139

Tab.29 - Tributary connector pin–out (male 25 pin SUB–D)................................................ 141

Tab.30 - Q3 connector pin–out for 10/100BaseT Ethernet connection (RJ45) ........................ 142

Tab.31 - S.C. connector pin–out for 64 kbit/s channel – V.11 interface (RJ45) ...................... 142

Tab.32 - S.C. connector pin–out – V.28 interface (RJ45).................................................... 142

Tab.33 - Connector pin–out – RS232 PPP interface (Sub-D 9 pin male)............................... 143

Tab.34 - User in/out connector pin–out (Sub-D 9 pin male) ............................................... 143

Tab.35 - Tributary IN/OUT - 75 Ohm .............................................................................. 145

Tab.36 - Tributary IN/OUT - 120 Ohm (50 pin SCSI female)............................................... 147

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003 319


Tab.37 - Q3/1 and Q3/2 100BaseT connector pin-out for 10/100BaseT Ethernet connection (RJ45)
148

Tab.38 - Connector pin-out RS232 PPP interface (SUBD 9 pin male).................................... 148

Tab.39 - CH1 connector pin-out for 9600 bit/s synchronous V.24 interface (RJ45)................. 149

Tab.40 - CH1 connector pin-out for 9600 bit/s asynchronous V.24 interface (RJ45) ............... 149

Tab.41 - CH1 connector pin-out for 1x9600 or 2x4800 kbit/s V.28 interface (RJ45) ............... 149

Tab.42 - CH2 connector pin-out for 64 kbit/s channel - V.11 interface (RJ45) ....................... 150

Tab.43 - 2 Mbit/s wayside connector pin-out (RJ45).......................................................... 150

Tab.44 - User IN/OUT connector pin-out (SUBD 9 pin male)............................................... 150

Tab.45 - Tributary IN/OUT - 75 Ohm (50 pin SCSI female) ................................................ 152

Tab.46 - Tributary IN/OUT - 120 Ohm (50 pin SCSI female)............................................... 153
Tab.47 - Q3/1 and Q3/2 100BaseT connector pin-out for 10/100BaseT Ethernet connection (RJ45)
154

Tab.48 - Connector pin-out RS232 PPP interface (RJ45)..................................................... 154


Tab.49 - V11 connector pin-out for 9600 bit/s asynchronous V.24 interface (RJ45) ............... 155

Tab.50 - V11 connector pin-out for 1x9600 or 2x4800 kbit/s V.28 asynchronous interface (RJ45)
155

Tab.51 - V11 connector pin-out for 64 kbit/s channel - V.11 interface (RJ45) ....................... 155

Tab.52 - User IN/OUT connector pin-out (SUBD 9 pin male)............................................... 156

Tab.53 - Torques for tightening screws............................................................................ 158

Tab.54 - Torques for tightening screws............................................................................ 159

Tab.55 - Waveguide bending radius according to frequency ............................................... 160

Tab.56 - Torques for tightening screws............................................................................ 175


Tab.57 - Torques for tightening screws............................................................................ 175

Tab.58 - Waveguide bending radius according to frequency ............................................... 177

Tab.59 - Torques for tightening screws............................................................................ 190


Tab.60 - Torques for tightening screws............................................................................ 211

Tab.61 - Torques for tightening screws............................................................................ 226

Tab.62 - Waveguide bending radius according to frequency ............................................... 239


Tab.63 - IDU part number .............................................................................................. 300

Tab.64 - P/N meaning .................................................................................................. 303

Tab.65 - IDU Plus part number....................................................................................... 305

Tab.66 - Example of ODU part number and hybrid part number.......................................... 309

320 ALS - MN.00183.E - 003


46 ASSISTANCE SERVICE

For more information, refer to the section relevant to the technical support on the Internet site of the com-
pany manufacturing the product.

ALS - MN.00183.E - 003 321


322 ALS - MN.00183.E - 003

Vous aimerez peut-être aussi